JP7188738B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") or a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

In a pachinko machine, noise generated by game balls rolling in a game area may affect electronic circuits. Therefore, when a reset signal is output from a reset means to a plurality of control means, it has been studied to suppress the adverse effects of noise and to accurately reset each control means. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the signal line for the reset signal is provided with a buffer for each control board. In addition, the reset signal can be output accurately while suppressing the influence of noise. That is, the power failure monitoring circuit and each control board are connected by a cable or the like, and the signal line is long. A gaming machine is described that can prevent an erroneous reset signal from being output and prevent each control board from being erroneously reset.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-300094

However, in the game machines mentioned above, it is necessary to suppress the effects of noise and reliably transmit signals between boards.
was not considered.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the influence of noise.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides main control means for performing lottery control and controlling the progress of a game based on the result of the lottery ;
a display device controlled by the main control means to display information about a game;
display signal output means for outputting a display signal to the display device;
A gaming machine comprising initialization means for outputting a reset signal,
the reset signal is output to the main control means and the display signal output means;
A path branched from a path of the reset signal output from the initialization means to the main control means and the display signal output means, the signal direction being able to be regulated on the path toward the display signal output means. a configured second signal direction regulating means;
In synchronism with the reset signal input to the second signal direction regulating means on the path of the reset signal from the initialization means to the main control means and output to the display signal output means, providing first signal direction regulation means configured to output a reset signal;
The first signal direction regulating means is a circuit in which a plurality of buffer circuits are connected in series like the second signal direction regulating means,
Said first signal direction regulating means and said second signal direction regulating means are integrated on the same one chip having a plurality of buffer circuits and a plurality of connection terminals electrically connected to the inputs and outputs of said buffer circuits. is a circuit
It is a gaming machine characterized by (See, eg, paragraphs 2413-2551, FIGS. 257-265, etc.).

According to the present invention, the influence of noise can be reduced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is the front view which cut|disconnected the front structural member and front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main-control MPU. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of character product ratio calculation and display processing. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the role product ratio calculation/display processing of FIG. 24; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code|code) stored in ROM and RAM which were built in main control MPU, and data. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character product ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the structure of a character thing ratio display. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit; FIG. 4 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of main-control MPU and a character-object ratio display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a load register selection table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table; It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a role product ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a role product ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area; It is a front view showing another example of the game board. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing; 10 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 10 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge|emission ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge|emission ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection|emission ball sensor and a main-control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a main control I/O port; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a main control I/O port; FIG. FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) concerning calculation of a base value. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on a base display; 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation processing; 106 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the base calculation processing of FIG. 105; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base display data generation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a modified example of base calculation processing; It is a figure which shows calculation of a base when a game state switches. It is a figure which shows the structure regarding a storage area among the internal structures of main-control MPU1311. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing; It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code|code) stored in ROM and RAM which were built in main control MPU, and data. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded on a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of game history. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the open state. 131 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 with the door closed; FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. 136 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine on which the game board shown in FIG. 135 is mounted; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing; It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special design variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big win. FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 151B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in FIG. 151(B); It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing; FIG. 4 is a timing diagram of security signals; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of setting confirmation processing; It is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. Table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. An example. Table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. An example. Table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. An example. It is an example of a notice effect table. It is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of the advance notice effect table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect; (A) is an example of an effect limit table during setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of an effect limit table when an error occurs. It is an example of a new start prize effect limit table. 1 is an example of a processing table 1; 3 is an example of a processing table 2; 3 is an example of a processing table 3; 4 is an example of a processing table 4; 5 is an example of a processing table 5; 6 is an example of a processing table 6; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of performance display processing of another example 1; It is a figure which shows the alert|reporting aspect of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing notification priorities of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 1; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality initialization processing of another example 1; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of setting processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of setting display processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2 of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1; 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning prize information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. be. FIG. 199(A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is another configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. It is a figure which shows. 10 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing of another example 1; 201A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1, 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on recovery destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202D is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the order of transmission of commands in another example 1; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing state transition of the setting state management area of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of a RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on of another example 2. FIG. It is a flow chart of the RAM abnormality outside the game area of another example 2 processing. 14 is a flowchart of RWM initialization processing outside the used area of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing of another example 2. FIG. FIG. 220A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of another example 2, and FIG. 220(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-off processing of another example 2; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 2; 10 is a flowchart of setting processing of another example 2; 10 is a flowchart of setting display processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 3; 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 3; 14 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 3; 13 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 3; It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for normal game of another example 3. 14 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 4; 19 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 4; It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front in which the center accessory and the display effect unit of the front unit of the game board are disassembled. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit luminesces the first pattern; FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit luminesces the second pattern; It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the structure of a reflective portion provided on the light guide plate; FIG. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the structure of a reflective portion provided on the light guide plate; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern seen planarly by a light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern seen planarly by a light-guide plate is displayed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing how a pattern viewed stereoscopically by a light guide plate is displayed; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing how a pattern viewed stereoscopically by a light guide plate is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; It is a circuit diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board. 4 is a circuit diagram showing connections between a serial/parallel conversion circuit and LEDs; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer; It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning on the main-control board|substrate of main-control MPU and peripheral components. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the port in main control MPU. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the timing of data output and capture by a synchronous serial signal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box; It is a block diagram showing the connection of the power supply system around the production drive board. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front member opened; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of a storage area provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and a ROM area in this embodiment; It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area|region in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character product ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area|region of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of regular processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing;

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from behind;

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side portion attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper dish 201 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200. A handle unit 500 that a player can operate to hit the ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives the game ball that fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower tray 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out game balls to the player side. A letter-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a character ratio indicator 1317 . The character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The character ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the character product ratio display 1317 is placed in the payout control board unit 95 instead of the main control unit 1300.
It may be set to 0.

Also, the character product ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without separately providing a display device for displaying the character product ratio. In this case, if the role ratio is always displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114 and 244, the player can be notified of the role ratio and the player can check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the total number of balls won. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said to be in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the role ratio, the numerical value of the role ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . For example, if the character ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and if it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the character ratio in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the role ratio may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Also, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the role ratio to notify the player of the role ratio. For example, when the role ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Alternatively, the information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided on the door frame 3 . In that case, the above-described display mode may be changed, and not only the role item ratio but also other information may be displayed. The other information includes the number of big wins, the number of consecutive big wins (so-called number of consecutive wins), the number of balls in possession, the remaining money, and the like.

Further, not only the character product ratio, but also a continuous character product ratio, a base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The character product ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the base value may be displayed in different ways.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin-made main control board box 1320 which is sealed in such a way that once it is closed, it cannot be opened without being destroyed, and is placed on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Furthermore, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the character ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 can be used for pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1 . By enclosing the character ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the character ratio display 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 look less gambling, and the pachinko machine 1 can be displayed accurately. It can display the gambling nature.

If the back cover 980 is formed of an opaque resin, the pachinko ball can be easily replaced by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The character product ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1 .

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 can be flattened or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio indicator 1317 may be made easy to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

At the bottom of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, a discharge port is provided for collecting the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the prize winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 for detecting game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318 . The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. On the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320, it is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) that it is a switch for operating the display of the character product ratio. The display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the character ratio display 1317, but even if it is not on the main control unit 1300, if it is a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, the effect control board 4700 , power supply device 4112 ), housing 4100 , or front member 4200 . It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Also, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and the game ball guided by the ball guiding unit 820 is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. a payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on the base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 which is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. An upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either a normal outlet or a full ball outlet according to the above, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 From the normal outlet of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path guides the discharged game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge opening forward and guides the game balls forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway leading to the full ball receptacle 530 .

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a bass speaker installed therein. 921, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside the box. an interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed;
A payout control board unit 950 is installed across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and accommodates a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls shot from the ball launching device 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front structural member 1000, a flat plate-like game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and the game panel 1100 It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a front unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning holes attached in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a ) and a back unit 3000 attached to the upper side of the board holder 1200 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 201, the ball shooting device 680 plays a game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. . Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Also, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front constituent members and the front unit of the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 .

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 which can accept game balls either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls circulate (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning slots 2001, and is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side unit top 2300 and a frame-shaped frame that is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006 A center accessory 2500 is provided.

The rear unit 3000 is arranged at a predetermined position in the rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A plurality of general prize winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. a mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging game balls received in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500; A lower right ball passage unit is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front view inside the back box 3010 and is used to discharge the game balls received in the second big winning port 2006 or the second out port 2543c of the center accessory 2500. 3035 and .

The rear unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and rotatably mounted to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped production drive board box 3042, a production drive board 3043 housed in the production drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the .

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front structural member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

A shot ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit into the game area 5a is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the shot ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a is detected. In addition, the shot ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position through which the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the shot ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspections at manufacturing sites and after installation in halls are facilitated.

A shot ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning game ball. That is, since game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 .

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 is one L that displays the game state.
A status indicator consisting of an ED and two LEDs are controlled to flash based on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball through the gate part 2003, so that the ordinary symbols are variably displayed, and then these two LEDs indicate the result of the ordinary lottery. The holding number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol display to be displayed in the lighting mode according to the Eight LEDs are controlled to flash based on the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 (occurrence of start winning prize). By this, after the first special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol display device that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the first special lottery result, and the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002. A first special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the pending number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the first special symbol, and a second start port 2004. Based on the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball (occurrence of the start winning prize), the eight LEDs are flashed and controlled to display the second special symbol. Of the second special symbol display device to be displayed in the lighting mode according to the lottery result, and the second special symbol variation display related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the start condition of the variation display is still established. A second special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations, which is the number of variable displays that do not exist, and a first big winning opening when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" etc. 2005 and a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the second big prize opening 2006. In addition, some indicators (for example, the first special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . In more detail, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1601 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. 1602 and . The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back case 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from the oblique rear of the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward to insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is pushed downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it inwards.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in which a game ball can be accepted in either one according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Three of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in the front view in the game area 5 a is arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004 . The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first big winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first start opening 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second large winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper large winning opening 2006a and a second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is composed of As for the second big winning opening 2006, the second upper big winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower big winning opening 2006b is arranged in the front view of the second upper big winning opening 2006a. It is positioned downwards on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning slots 2001, and is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side unit top 2300 and a frame-shaped frame that is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006 A center accessory 2500 is provided.

[2-8a. starting unit]
Next, starter unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described. The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. This starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first big winning opening 2005 .

The starting port unit 2100 includes a flat plate-like unit base 2101 having a first grand prize winning port 2005 which is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left and right direction and which penetrates in the front and back direction. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from the upper part of the left-right direction approximately center above the big winning opening 2005 and forming the first starting opening 2002, and the first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guide portion 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guide portion 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the main prize winning opening 2005 .

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize winning port 2005 from behind, and the front end is opened forward with substantially the same size as the first big prize winning port 2005. A box-shaped unit case 2111 and a flat plate-shaped first big prize door with a horizontally elongated rectangular shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so as to be able to open and close the first big prize gate 2005. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received by the first big winning opening 2005. A first large winning opening sensor 2114 that detects a game ball, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, and a first large winning opening sensor 2114 and a main control board 1310 and a starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with the starter unit, and a starter unit decoration board (not shown) attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 for decorating the first grand prize winner 2005 with light. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward to a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time. The first big prize winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward with a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided by a ball guiding portion 2103 to the unit base. After being guided downward at the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be penetrated and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting hole sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting hole sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting hole At 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been received. This makes it possible to detect a fraudulent act by inserting a fraudulent tool into the first starting opening 2002 .

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first big winning opening 2005 . This first big prize winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and The first big prize winning port 2005 can be opened from the closed state by rotating so as to move downward.

The first large prize winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning prize opening 2005 . Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first big prize winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in position. In other words, the first big prize winning opening door member 2112 is inclined forward from the lower side of the first big winning prize opening 2005 .

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big prize winning port 2005 and contacts the first big prize winning port door member 2112, the inclination of the first big prize winning port door member 2112 causes the game ball to flow from below. It changes to the rear, is received by the first big winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111 . After being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114 , the game ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 is ejected downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 .

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various production devices during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310 , and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 1510 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511 . and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling display of effect images on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., and a launch control unit 953 that controls launch of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504 .

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, etc., and an input/output device (I /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, a main control and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311 . The main control MPU 1311 has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes the first starting hole sensor 2104 that detects the game ball accepted in the first starting hole 2002, and the second starting hole sensor that detects the game ball accepted in the second starting hole 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2547 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003, and a game ball that has been received in the first big winning hole 2005. 1st big prize winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole 2006a as second big winning hole 2006 and second big winning hole sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2006b and Detected signals from the second lower grand prize opening sensor 2557, the discharged ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are sent through the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is entered.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker Output a drive signal to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, or from the main control I / O port 1314 to the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the second special symbol display device, the first special symbol storage A drive signal is output to an indicator, a second special symbol memory indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal symbol memory indicator, a game state indicator, a round indicator, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning hole sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, And detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 2104, the second starter sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. FIG. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently released. Since the ball enters, the game ball is frequently detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole sensor 2557. For this reason, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. For example, it transmits to the peripheral control unit 1511 . In addition, when the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 , the various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board in the power board box 930 . The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. do.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

A character ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . The character product ratio display 1317 displays the character product ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311 .

A display switch 1318 is also provided on the main control board 1310 . The display switch 1318 may be a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 . Note that the role product ratio display 1317 may always display the role product ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318 .

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311. As shown in FIG.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120 , an arithmetic circuit 13121 and a reset circuit 13122 .

The CPU 13111 executes programs stored in the ROM 1313 . A RAM 1312 stores data necessary for program execution.

One or more random number generation circuits 13112 are provided in the main control MPU 1311 . The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery results of the variable display game results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generating circuit 13112 is a so-called hard random number generating means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of, for example, the clock period supplied to the main control MPU 1311 (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period). The hard random numbers generated by the random number generating circuit 13112 are used for special symbol winning lotteries, special symbol variation display game winning symbol lotteries, and normal symbol winning lotteries.

A parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315 .

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various commands regarding the control of game effects and various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 to/from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314 . In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to the payout of game balls to/from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314 . Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the character product ratio to the character product ratio display device 1317 . A detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

A timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 with external devices. An I/O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0-A15), and 8-bit data (D0-D7) can be input/output from the external bus interface 13117 .

A clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from an input external clock signal (eg, 32 MHz). Also, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the result from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the character ratio indicator 1317 may be output.

A verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether or not the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313 . This arithmetic function is permanently written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is by an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time elapses and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 . The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121. As shown in FIG.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of a program for the arithmetic result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215 .

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product. It functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores multipliers and multiplicands of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214 . The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214 . The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock). , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks has passed, the multiplication result register 131214 can be referenced to acquire the multiplication result.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts an input value (divisor, dividend) into a quotient and remainder by a function and outputs the result.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216 and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the stored values are read out at a predetermined timing, and the quotient obtained by dividing the dividend by the divisor is obtained. Division result register A131218
, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. In addition, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Also, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 . In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may not be erased at read timing. Further, even if the division input registers 131216 and 131217 already store values (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219 . The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed within a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). After the values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks has passed, the division result registers 131218 and 131219 can be referenced to obtain the quotient and remainder.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value. It takes. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt processing (see FIGS. 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing during the period from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing can be efficiently executed during timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 20 shows a configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114. As shown in FIG.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission/reception circuits, and each data transmission/reception circuit transmits/receives data for one channel to/from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 shows only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has, as described above, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, character ratio Three channels are used, channel 2 used to communicate with driver circuit 13171 of display 1317, channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142 . The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO with a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144 .

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118 . Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

A command status register 3145 is a register referred to for checking the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, transmission trigger setting level register 3147 and baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings are described in detail below. A communication format for each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether or not to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, 1 xxx 1010B meaning even parity is set, and for channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317, FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B meaning no parity are set.

In FIFO mode, the FIFO of transmit data register 3142 is used to transmit data. In addition, since the game machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the character ratio display device 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the effect of noise is small compared to communication with other boards via communication wires. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit in the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is empty, and to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 .

Note that the bit in the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period of time, if the corresponding bit of the status register is not set, the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 does not have an empty space. It may be determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be performed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 1200 bps is set for channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted on each channel. This is because game balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuits of the gaming machine are in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, the data for controlling the output of balls directly related to the profit given to the player is transmitted at a low speed to the payout control board 951 so as to be reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the ball being put out. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it determines that it is abnormal, it does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes abnormality processing (for example, communication error notification), and the command request retransmission of Then, if the resent command is determined to be normal, the normal command is used to restore the state of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting gate to the start of the pattern fluctuation, which may reduce interest.

The communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between If the data transmission rate is increased, other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 or the like. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted at each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. returns to normal, so there is no need to reduce the transmission rate extremely.

Command status register 3145 is a register referred to for checking the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC This is a flag indicating completion of transmission, 0 indicating that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicating completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (a communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that transmission data is empty. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and no transmission data is stored in the transmission data register 3142 .

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, the flag indicates the transmission FIFO trigger level. amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 .
Bits 5-2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL Bit to clear transmit buffer, break code transmit, empty transmit data, or set transmit FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), written externally. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set to the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but transmission of the written command is canceled due to some circumstances (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the other party of communication (the driver circuit 13171 of the character product ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. FIG. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, or a serial communication circuit for asynchronous communication and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data loading timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine is continued. Although not shown in detail, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching solenoid 682 that controls shooting. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guide unit 820, and a ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball extracting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 951 is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball out detection sensor 827, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. be.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784 , the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310 . In addition, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951 .

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. When there is, a ``counting switch error'' (specifically, a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified, and the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, "full tank (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it informs that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the discharge reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit, A ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to a ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle lever 504, and a stop sensor that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is to be forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a drive current for firing a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, and a firing reference pulse is input. Triggered by this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682 . On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, thereby feeding the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 540 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is terminated, the output of the constant current is stopped to feed the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

In addition, the power board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that controls effects based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 .

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various production units provided in 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the production drive board 3043, and the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibrating device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272; door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like; or to transmit control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control section to the liquid crystal display control section 1512, In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that indicates that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and sounds in accordance with various effects from the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, the movable body driving command, the display command , and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting flashing command to the LED of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs the received game board side lighting flashing command A lighting signal or blinking signal based on is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5. - 特許庁

In addition, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibrating device 242 and door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. output to

[3-3b. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for this process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 1310 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit. , and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V-blank signal, which will be described later, which is executed when a V-blank signal is input to notify that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. In this case, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, it monitors whether or not the operation button 220C is operated, and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation button 220C in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP in the display data creation process described later is transferred to the VDP built-in sound source on the game board side decorative substrate 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decoration board 233 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decoration board 3053 and the door frame side decoration board 233 .

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process to be described later to the speaker 921, or notifies other than the music and sound effects. It outputs sound data of sounds and notification sounds to the speaker 921 .

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation,
The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the tone generator built-in VDP.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data, the number of the light emission data from the top light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of each LED. , to update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data such as music and sound effects arranged in time series, and the sound command data indicating the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, the first sound A pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data is to be output from the command data to the tone generator built-in VDP.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decoration board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the commands analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above include various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormal notifications. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution, are stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into various commands for status display, such as In the case of the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side decoration board 3053 (drawing device), the door frame side A decorative substrate 233 (rendering device) and a lamp (rendering device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to deter fraudulent actions on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data Created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set it in the peripheral control RAM, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the signal is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the tone generator built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side decoration board 3053. And drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decoration board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the tone generator built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up in the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the tone generator built-in VDP to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the VDP with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 61 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control section steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

Next, step S1 in the peripheral controller steady-state processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing in FIG.
In 010, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by activating the 1ms interrupt timer will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 62 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointer drives various motors, solenoids, and other electrical drive sources according to the drive data indicated by , updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time, Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side performance receiver IC of the door frame side decoration board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door-frame-side rendering receiver IC SDIC0 of the door-frame-side decoration board 233 from the door-frame-side rendering transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal that is output to inform the decision when it is judged.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the first backup area and the second backup area for backup, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and the backup second area, respectively, to be backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decoration board 3053 and the door frame side decoration board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 as well. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control section]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail, but is implemented as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. and have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Drawing control of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511 . Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. schedule data corresponding to , non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command), etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. It is The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data is the screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and displays it on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate. Rendering data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated rendering data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. do. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer system" is a method in which drawing data for one line for drawing in the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer, and the line buffer stores the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the retained drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 , the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 .

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device 244 cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top plate liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the top plate liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top plate liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are drawn.

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. and sub-scanning that repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control section 1512, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the signals are sequentially output to the pixels of one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and drawing data for the next line is similarly input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 are sequentially scanned one line from left to right as viewed from the front. output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 by the player. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the handle lever 504 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. In other words, game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By coming into contact with the game ball, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the top of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left of the highest part in front view, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are generated. While contacting the center accessory 2500, it flows down in the left area. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened in the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and passes through the center role. It is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523 from the warp exit 2522 opening in the frame of 2500 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right to reach the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction, or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right of it. is emitted backward from either When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 The ball is accepted into the first launch port 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in this first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters (is hit) to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500. ), and enters into the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstructing pegs are planted, and the game ball circulates while abutting against the obstructing pegs and variously changing its flowing direction. The upper right circulation space 3541 has a gate portion 2003 at its upper portion, and a general prize winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 at its lower portion.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters into the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right circulation passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is the second upper big winning hole 2006a and the second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged side by side as the second big winning hole 2006. The upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 pass through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and enter the game area 5a from the left end of the lowered release plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is open so that the game ball is directed to the first large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state , When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the second attacker path 2543a, the game ball is accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability.

A game ball that circulates in the right circulation path 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flows down while an increase in circulation speed is suppressed by a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 . In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, it may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged outside the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, normal random numbers are updated within a numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one normal random number from among them and comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time saving control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction in the front view to open the second start opening. 2004 is opened, and it is possible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-saving control is executed, a lottery is drawn to select which of the ``first normal win'', ``second normal win'', and ``third normal win'' as the ``normal win'' in the normal lottery. Then, when the time saving control is executed, the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is either "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". By rotating in the counterclockwise direction in the front view and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 over a predetermined period. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening and closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times). In addition, when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "first ordinary hit", the second start port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls 5 times "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit""0.3seconds","0.28seconds","1.1seconds", and "0.2 seconds" as the periods of five times in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state capable of accepting game balls.
8 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "3rd ordinary win", the second start port 2004 is put in a state capable of accepting game balls 5. The period of each time is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and " The 3rd Normal Win” is more advantageous to the player than the 1st Normal Win (easy acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004). In addition, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbols are displayed after starting the variable display of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time) is set until the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of the time saving control described later, the control for shortening the normal fluctuation time is performed more than normal (the state in which the time saving control is not performed). In addition, the opening time to rotate the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the game state, for example, time saving control is performed. You may make it change the opening time of the 2nd starting mouth 2004 to a long time compared with the case where time saving control is performed when there is nothing.

In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, until the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device is stopped and displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is indicated), a new game ball is placed in the gate section. After passing 2003, it is not possible to start the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device, so the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is continued until the variable display of the previous normal symbols is completed (the result of the normal lottery I'm trying to put it on hold until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 by the gate sensor 2547, and the normal symbol fluctuation display can be started. The start of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. It should be noted that the number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of 4, and the game balls that pass through the gate section 2003 are discarded without being held. . As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 updates the numerical range predetermined. One first special random number is obtained from one special random number, and the obtained first special random number is collated with a predetermined big hit determination table to provide an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit") that is advantageous to the player. , "small win", etc.) is performed. Then, based on the first special lottery result drawn, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds). After that, the first special lottery result The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the first special lottery after the first special symbol is variably displayed). The results of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 include "lose", "minor win", "2R big win", "8R big win", and "10R big win". By comparing the first special random number obtained with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of these, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, the probability is about 1/395 Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability variable state): winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/44 in this example) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than winning a jackpot) Whether to execute (whether it is a probability variable jackpot) and whether to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is lost (whether it is a time saving jackpot) ) and the period for executing the time saving control (the number of times of time saving: special design (the number of fluctuations of the first special design and the second special design)) is also discriminated. Incidentally, the winning probability of the "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball accepted in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 The second special random number is acquired, and the obtained second special random number is collated with a predetermined big hit determination table to create an advantageous game state (for example, "big win", "small win", etc.) that is advantageous to the player. ) is held for the results of the second special lottery. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) After the second special lottery result The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the second special lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004 includes "loss", "2R big win", "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", There are ``7R jackpot'', ``8R jackpot'', and ``16R jackpot'', and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of these, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable state) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) than the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/395 in this example): this example Then you will win the jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) Whether to execute (whether it is a probability variable jackpot or not), and at least if the second special lottery result is lost Time saving control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual Whether or not (time saving state) is executed (whether it is a time saving jackpot) and the period for executing time saving control (number of times of time saving: special pattern (number of fluctuations of first special hitting pattern and second special pattern))) and also discriminate It is designed to be

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , Eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) after the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Either of 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 will be in a state in which a game ball can be received with a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is accepted in the first big winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2006) Game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201. - 特許庁Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. Balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R big win", the first big winning hole 2005 holds the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Repeat the open/close pattern multiple times (eg, twice) to reach an acceptable open state and then close. On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win", and "16R big win", the first big prize opening 2005 or the second large prize winning port 2006, after it becomes an open state capable of receiving a game ball, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or it is predetermined to the first large winning prize port 2005 Either the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning hole 2006, and any condition is satisfied. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball is in a closed state, is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 rounds for a "4R big win", 5 rounds for a "5R big win", and 16 rounds for a "16R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R big win" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) It is difficult to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 substantially in the opening and closing pattern that closes after becoming an open state that can accept the game ball. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery results are "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win" and "16R big win". (After the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 becomes an open state capable of receiving a game ball, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big winning hole 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the second big winning port 2006 or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning opening 2006 When this condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the open/close pattern that makes it impossible to accept the game ball. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win", "16R big win", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, or the first big winning opening 2005 is preliminarily determined. Either the number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning opening 2006, any condition is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball is in a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as a substantial special lottery result, and the number (for example, , 7) game balls are accepted or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second big winning hole 2006, or any condition is satisfied, the game balls are satisfied. and the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R big win" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds 0.6 seconds), it may be provided to execute a plurality of rounds. For example, as a result of the special lottery, "8R jackpot with substantially 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005, or the second big prize opening 2006, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted or any condition is satisfied, after repeating the open/close pattern four times to make the game balls unacceptable to the closed state, The opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), An opening/closing pattern that closes after being in an open state capable of accepting game balls) may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged side by side. In the case of "jackpot", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a is opened to allow the reception of game balls, and is closed when the conditions for not accepting the game balls are satisfied, making it possible to accept the next game balls. Until (during the interval), the second lower big winning hole 2006b is opened to start the next round (2Rth) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower big winning hole 2006b becomes unacceptable, In the meantime, since the period of the interval has passed, the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a is opened again and the game ball can be received. Then, the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper big winning hole 2006a or the second lower big winning hole 2006b can receive a game ball during the "jackpot". When the game ball is circulated in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting right with , the game ball is surely accepted in the second big prize winning port 2006, and the game ball is not left out to entertain the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described multiple types of big wins, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the end of the big win game is differentiated according to the game state at the time of winning the big win. For example, when the result of the first special lottery is an 8R normal jackpot in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big win game in a non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big win game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. When the result of the second special lottery is a 2R normal jackpot in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big win game in a non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big win game. On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is the 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big win game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result in the low probability non-time-saving state (both probability improvement control and time-saving control are not executed: normal state) Execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game In the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the 2R probability improvement control is executed after the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are big hits in a state other than the normal state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time reduction control is executed. In the case of a big hit, time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) Until the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device newly start the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the start of the fluctuation display of the special design (first special design, second special design) until the end of the fluctuation display of the previous special design (first special design, second special design) (first special lottery pending the completion of the results and the suggestion of the results of the second special draw). Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted in the first starting hole 2002 by the first starting hole sensor 2104, and the second starting hole sensor 2551 The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second start port 2004 is stored, and special symbols (first special symbol, second special The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. In addition, the first special random number and the second special random number holding number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 are respectively up to four, and more than that are used in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A ball is accepted but discarded instead of being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings. Also, of the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310, the second special random number is preferentially digested. That is, regardless of the reception timing of the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is repeated lighting and extinguishing of the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a predetermined time. The lights are blinked and then stopped in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). The variable display of the decorative pattern rows is started, and then the display is stopped sequentially (in this example, the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in order), and finally all the decorative pattern rows are stopped. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the start winning occurs, the plurality of decorative pattern rows fluctuate. After being displayed, an effect image is displayed that is stop-displayed so as to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). In addition, the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special design variably displayed on the first special design display or the second special design variably displayed on the second special design display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decoration pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 .

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates to indicate the final image). is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the result of the special lottery by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, and the like are displayed according to the special lottery result of the lottery. Middle decoration unit 3050, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, system/user reset processing executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset processing. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of initialization processing of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure notice voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit detects the power failure. A blackout warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating the watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has passed, the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has passed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the role product ratio calculation work area (the role product ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after normal processing such as power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. S30) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. (other than the character product ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether or not the work area for character product ratio calculation (area for character product ratio calculation 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the role product ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In addition, when one or more backup areas are provided in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using the check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

As for the area for calculating the role product ratio, the data in the area for calculating the role product ratio 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, each predetermined number of shot balls, each predetermined number of winning balls, each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) Data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

Thus, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are different for each type of data (the game control data 13132 and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase conditionally. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. For this reason, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased, thereby preventing erasure of the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of an abnormal state of the character ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high or low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes initial setting for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is performed and interrupts are permitted. moreover,
Initialize the serial communication port and test signal output port. Start the hardware random number generator. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the character product ratio display 1317 is set. Furthermore, after starting the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114, initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is performed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing for setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . A power-on command is generated by setting the power-on state reference command as reference command data and adding command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The state buffer command at power-on is a command for notifying the game state at the time of restoration after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). Initialization of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initialization means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure warning signal is not ON (result of step S38 is "No"), that is, random number update processing is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers for judging wins are mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. Note that random number update processing for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery is executed by timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are defined as the main control side main process (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, and writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prevented, thereby protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S44). Specifically, power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption during the time until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the role product ratio calculation work area (the role product ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. It should be noted that the check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated in the character product ratio calculation/display process instead of the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the character product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the role product ratio calculation work (area for role product ratio calculation 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) in the character product ratio calculation/display process instead of the process when the power is turned off on the main board side.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the character ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the character ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , the function ratio in long-term operation can be calculated.

Furthermore, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the system waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization processing shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 . FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payout control board 951, which tells that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command sent in the normal manner, is read from the payout control board 951 and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, in the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, a payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not an ACK signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the small hit are updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure. The random number for design initial value determination is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The processing of step S81 can be skipped when there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). In the payout control board 951, by the payout control program, various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are transmitted. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the normally received command as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In addition, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize ball discharges is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 .

The character ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the character ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program creates a prize-winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, based on the jackpot symbol random number value, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Then, when the variable probability transition condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to the probability variable state after that, and when the variable probability transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively high compared to the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. A game advantageous to the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switch 1318 is operated. By referring to the number of winning balls stored in the calculation area 13128, the role ratio is calculated. Then, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S89). Thus, by calling the role product ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the role product ratio, it is possible to confirm the role product ratio (gambling property of the pachinko machine 1) based on the most recent data.

Regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated or not, if a body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the character ratio may be displayed. . Also, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317. good too. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, when the role ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the role ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the character product ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25 . A specific example of the display method of the character product ratio will be described later. In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (character ratio, continuous character ratio, total, total total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, You may calculate only the values that Also, the character product ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated character product ratio may be displayed on the character product ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Note that even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the role product ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the role product ratio even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the jackpot game When in the state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output Various information (game information) signals related to games such as signals, information output information during time saving, start winning prize information output signals, and security signals are output to the payout control board 951 .

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio in the timer interrupt process. You may perform the calculation process of a material ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be sent a command for displaying the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, or from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 A command for displaying the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of character product ratio calculation/display processing. The main control MPU 1311 executes the role product ratio calculation/display processing. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the character product ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral controller 1511 calculates the character product ratio, the calculated character product ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within (or outside) a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the role product ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed to make the notice effect more interesting than the normal notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is compared with the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so the role product ratio calculation process is executed, and the role is calculated from the data in the main area. The product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the character ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the ratio by the number of continuous acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. It is preferable to truncate or round off the decimal part (value below the decimal point) of the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, each time the character product ratio and/or the continuous character product ratio in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the character ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and division is performed. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit calculations, the lowest 16 bits of the number of winning balls stored in 32 bits with a value of 1 is taken out and calculated. It is preferable to divide by storing in a register (16 bits). If the number of acquired balls is less than the maximum number of bits (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits) that can be used for calculation, the lower 16 bits should be taken out and used for calculation.

Also, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the decimal point) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the character ratio, calculation using decimal numbers can be avoided.

Also, the upper limit of the character product ratio may be set to 99, and may be set to 99 when the calculation result of the character product ratio is 100 or more.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculation of the character product ratio from the data in the backup area 1 is performed. try. Specifically, the check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. (step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), a role product ratio calculation process is executed, and a role product ratio and a continuous role product ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, so the character product ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. try. Specifically, the check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. (step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154 ), a role product ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read, and the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the character product ratio calculation work area (character product ratio calculation area 13128) is initialized, and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The reason why the check code is calculated in the character ratio calculation/display process is that if it is reset in the middle of the power failure process on the main board side, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated. Although the backed-up data is initialized, if the check code is calculated and stored periodically in the character ratio calculation/display process, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved even if the pachinko machine is turned on again. This is because the data in (character product ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area allocation counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). It is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas by sorting the copy destinations of the data in the main area according to the backup area allocation counter value and writing the data only to a part of the backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas to which data is written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of role product ratio and the calculated value, a conversion table (not shown) is referenced to acquire data to be displayed on each digit of the role product ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the character product ratio display 1317 . For example, if the type of role product ratio is the role product ratio (total), A7 is displayed in the upper two digits, and if the calculated role product ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

The character ratio calculation process (step S156) of the character ratio calculation/display process reads the number of acquired balls from the character ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the work area for calculating the character ratio shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of winning balls in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage area of the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

As explained above, the data for calculating the character product ratio in the character product ratio calculation/display process is duplicated in the backup area. , the data for calculating the character ratio can be protected.

It should be noted that the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and thus may be configured with one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code in the main area and the check code in the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ from model to model. However, if the data check and backup methods are shared among the models, they may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. FIG.

ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debugging (inspection function) code 13133, debugging (inspection function) data 13134, character ratio calculation/display code 13135, and character ratio calculation/display An area for storing data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 and a character ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the character ratio, such as the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

Between the end address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, there is a free space (unused space) of 16 bytes or more, and when displayed in dump list format In addition, the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the leading address of the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in the form of a dump list, the debug (inspection function) area and the character product ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the empty area should be the same fixed value, and should be set to a value different from or less frequently set to the value set in the game area and debug area. Also, the value stored in the empty area may be an instruction that the CPU does nothing, such as a No Operation code. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and character ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the character ratio and the data 13136 for calculating/displaying the character ratio may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the character-object ratio calculation area. good. That is, it is sufficient if the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and character object Ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a malfunction (such as a bug) of the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 affects game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game. A code 13133 for outputting an inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, the role product ratio calculation area stores a program for the purpose of calculating the role product ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Also, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311 . In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131 . The processing based on the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed. is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

Also, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The character product ratio calculated by the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 . As illustrated, the role product ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is inspected and the game control code 13131 is stored. can be performed separately from the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, and the labor of inspecting the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the role product ratio can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the character product ratio calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The character product ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area for storing the calculation result of the character product ratio, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set each time the data in the main area is updated in the character ratio calculation/display process, or is set in the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. 22 steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power failure process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if the power failure flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Incidentally, if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether or not the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control side power-off process, the values in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Also, in the role product ratio calculation/display process, every time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The data of the number of winning balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) clocked by the main control MPU 1311, and the character ratio calculation processing (step in FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display processing S156). In this way, the role ratio calculation/display process reads out the data of the number of acquired balls from the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the data of the number of acquired balls in the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio. By writing , the game control program and the program for calculating and displaying the character ratio can be completely separated, and the program for calculating and displaying the character ratio can be shared even on amusement machines with different specifications. .

Note that the role product ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the role product ratio calculation/display process is
The calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio are written in the storage area for the role product ratio and continuous role product ratio of the area for calculating the role product ratio 13128 . Data of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio are read in the character ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the character ratio calculation/display process when displaying the character ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio of the character product ratio calculation area 13128 .

FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of winning ball, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the ratio of the winning role, and the ratio of the continuous winning role are stored. The number of prize balls obtained is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes for the prizes in operation (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, the second start opening 2004 that the second start opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive award winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize to a role while the role is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during a series of jackpot wins). The total number of won balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The continuous role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired in a row divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numeric values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of successive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are stored. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data are moved, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of acquired balls, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area one before the write pointer. This is for calculating the character ratio using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. Yes, when the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the role ratio and continuous role ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer completes one cycle, the total accumulated value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of winning character balls, the number of consecutive winning ball, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other won balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes other than accessories (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, the general winning opening 2001). The total number of won balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. As for the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area with the write pointer is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the role ratio and the continuous winning balls are updated. The product ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), it is possible to obtain more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B). , other winning hole winning ball number, continuous role winning ball number, total winning ball number, role ratio and continuous role ratio are stored. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of winning balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of special electric accessory acquired balls, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. When the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous component ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric winning balls Each of the number, the number of winning balls for the special electric accessory, the number of winning balls for the starting opening, and the number of winning openings is a storage area of 2 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 65,535 in decimal. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of continuous winning balls, total number of winning balls, number of normal electric winning balls, number of special electric winning balls, number of starting balls and other winning balls The cumulative total of numbers is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of acquired balls, number of other acquired balls, number of continuous acquired balls, total number of acquired balls, ratio of role, ratio of continuous roles, number of normal electric accessories acquired, number of special electric accessories acquired, starting point The number of winning balls and the total cumulative number of winning balls are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16,777,215 or 4,294,967,295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the sum total and total sum of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are each a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total number of acquired balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes other than accessories (a winning opening that does not open and close). The number of winning balls of the normal electric accessory is the prize balls obtained by winning the normal electric accessory in operation (the second start port 2004 with the second start port door member 2549 open) according to the result of the lottery based on the normal pattern. is a number. The number of winning balls of the special electric role is the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special electric role in operation (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that are open) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The number of winning balls from the starting opening is the number of winning balls obtained by winning the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of winning balls obtained from other winning openings is the number of winning balls obtained by winning a winning opening (general winning opening 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of normal electric accessory winning balls, the number of special electric accessory winning balls, the number of starting opening winning balls, the number of other winning opening winning balls, the number of consecutive winning ball balls, and the total number of winning balls are obtained in step S81 of timer interrupt processing. The data in the storage area with the write pointer is updated, and the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of timer interrupt processing.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when the stored value is determined to be abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. Data will not be erased on the occasion of Therefore, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be erased for each predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the character product ratio is over 100%, the calculation result of the character product ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value , the number of winning balls>total number of winning balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. All the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted in addition to the abnormal value. In addition, when the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value, an abnormality may be notified. Also, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the character product ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of character ratio indicator]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the character product ratio display 1317. As shown in FIG.

The character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172 . For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package as a unit, but both may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the character ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the character ratio display 1317 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 . The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 . The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 .

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7 segment LED 13172 . The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp are. Although the direction of the signal (current) shown in the figure differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is of the anode common type or the cathode common type, an example of the anode common type is shown.

The R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 is connected to a resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 . By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the light emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317. As shown in FIG.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, an 8x4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2x8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 , a Digit-Limit controller 3181 , a duty ratio controller 3182 , a data selector controller 3183 , a standby mode controller 3184 and an oscillator 3185 .

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the operation mode and the corresponding register. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data for the detailed settings.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and D15 to D8 are controlled by each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184), and send D7-D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rise timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Also, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the fall timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 . A latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects data register 0, that is, the 8-bit Digit-A A signal is sent to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided for the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174 .

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decode table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to 2×8 data selector 3176 .

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting and selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 Select data from data selector 3174 . The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178 .

The constant current driver 3178 uses data from the 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. The current output from constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal, as described above.

Driver 3179 accepts a sink current of the current output from constant current driver 3178 to illuminate each segment of seven segment LED 13172 . Driver 3179 controls the current sink timing of terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) to display.

Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by driver circuit 13171 . That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXXXXX0011B, a setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control section 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is lit. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by external setting, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights. The duty ratio control section 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179 . Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 can be set to 16 stages of duty from 0/16 to 15/16. Ratio settings are written.

A data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not the decoder 3175 is used by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the settings for using the decoder are written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000××. By inputting the data of XXB, the NO DECODER setting that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. It controls the x8 data selector 3176 to select data from the 8x4 data selector 3174 .

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode setting and data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is interrupted, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held therein by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates the clocks used within driver circuit 13171 .

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by solid lines, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is indicated by dotted lines.

FIG. 31(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of the implementation example 1. FIG. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. (sticker, engraving, printing, etc.) or tamper seal is attached. The unsealed seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310 .

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes a main control unit 1300 . The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that it has not been improperly remodeled. Moreover, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that it has not been improperly remodeled by arranging no parts around it.

The character ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the character ratio indicator 1317 should be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction of the character ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are aligned in the same direction. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is installed in the game machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the character ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310. It is preferable to implement the character ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that it becomes. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is installed in a game machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the character ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to implement the character ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be oriented.

Connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out signal lines from the main control board 1310 have ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (upper side Although it is the upper end along the side, it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the character ratio display 1317, and it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at a position where the character ratio display 1317 is not obstructed. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to a position that does not overlap with either the main control MPU or the character ratio indicator 1317 .

By mounting the character ratio display 1317 in this way, the model number display of the character ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct direction, and the visibility of these is improved. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the character ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the character ratio indicator 1317 . Also, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 . This is because the importance of circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 is low when inspecting unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them in the same orientation on the main control board 1310 .

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the character ratio indicator 1317. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101 L1) arranged to be shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Also, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311, as indicated by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but the length L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in different packages, and in either case, they are mounted such that L1 is greater than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the character ratio indicator 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram showing the implementation example shown in FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 . Furthermore, on the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 where no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101 . It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 as a guard pattern or a power supply pattern on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106 .

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 should avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 placed so that they do not cross). Also, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the rear surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105 . In this case as well, the signal line 13104 is arranged to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not cross each other).

In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It can also be applied to multi-layer substrates (4-layer, 6-layer, etc.) having inner layers.

FIG. 33 shows a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171. As shown in FIG.

A load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171 .

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by duty ratio control section 3182 to set the duty ratio for lighting 7 segment LED 13172 . For example, when D15-D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for setting the duty ratio and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control section 3182. FIG.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence/absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence/absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 .

The data registers are used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D to set the data to be displayed on each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, if D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for turning on the 7-segment LEDs and is written to the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence/absence of decoding, and the number of display digits, which are set in the registers described above, do not need to be set every time the character ratio is displayed. is set as Note that if the setting is made only once in the initial setting, there is a possibility that the setting will be changed due to the influence of noise after the initial setting. is pressed). As a result, correct display can always be performed even if the settings are switched due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data for display on 7-segment LED 13172 . By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. When displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the numbers to be displayed, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). is prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions for blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. A blank command shuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179 . The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after completing each setting. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. D11 to D8 select a register into which data is to be written, and D7 to D0 input contents to be set in the register (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the data side constant current driver 3178 to light all segments of the 7 segment LED 13172 . Standby instructions are divided into two types according to parameters: a standby instruction for transitioning to a standby state and a clear instruction for transitioning to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operation of the constant current drivers 3178 and 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. A clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a kind of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state of full lighting of the 7-segment LEDs, lighting of some segments, and complete extinguishing of the segments.

A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so the initial state (ALL BLANK) is present. All segments of are turned off. Also, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the character ratio indicator 1317 cannot be visually recognized, so it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

After initial setting is completed by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 , when display data is input, a predetermined display is performed on the 7-segment LED 13172 . As for this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits or all segments may be lit. It is preferable that the normal operation of the character product ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that the character product ratio display 1317 can be confirmed to be operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

When the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighted according to the input data). Specifically, the character product ratio display state is entered, a code indicating the display content is displayed on the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and the value of the character product ratio is displayed on the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the character ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed character product ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display the fact so as to be identifiable. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, another kind of character product ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the left two digits indicate the code indicating the display content, and the right two digits indicate the value of the character ratio. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the character ratio 2 is 63%. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is preferable to provide a display that allows the user to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the character product ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the character ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is preferable to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This character product ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different aspect as long as it can be distinguished from the character product ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the character ratio indicator 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the character ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be illuminated, blinked, or displayed differently for each digit. Also, the abnormal display may be in a form different from that illustrated, as long as it is distinguishable from the normal character product ratio display in order to indicate that the character product ratio display is not possible.

In addition, when an all-lighting command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. In addition, when a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while retaining data. In addition, when a data clear command is input in any state, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the character product ratio will be described.

As described above, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310 . As described above, the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device. display.

Also, the character ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the value of the role product ratio and the type of the value.

The display mode of the numerical value of the role product ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the result of comparison between the role product ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the role product ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference value, etc.). By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the character ratio is abnormal.

The character ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, when the character product ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the character product ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Also, when the role product ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is lit, and when the role product ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, it is displayed by blinking.

When the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the character ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the character ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are lit. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display contents (character ratio or continuous character ratio, recent data display or mid-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the period for collecting prize ball data is short, and the value of the character ratio may not have converged, so it is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.) You may It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-described reference value.

The character product ratio display 1317 may display the latest data, the medium-term data, and the long-term data by switching. The most recent data display is the role product ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C). The medium-term data display is the role product ratio calculated using the cumulative sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C). The long-term data display is the character product ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C).

The function display unit 1400 may also be used as the character ratio indicator 1317 . The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the character ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the body frame 4, it is preferable to continue the progress of the game. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the character product ratio display to the display of the game state. For example, when the body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the character ratio is displayed, but if the body frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. can. Since the special pattern displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative pattern stops at the timing when the special pattern variable display of the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the character ratio, it can be configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

The character product ratio display 1317 may display other than the character product ratio. For example, the number of winnings per type of winning opening per unit time and the number of winning balls paid out may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, or 10 hours.

The character ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding special prizes (during big hits), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (number of out balls) is detected by a shot ball sensor 1020 . As described above, the shot ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Also, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060 . As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through an out-hole 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected based on the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by various winning opening sensors 3015 , 2114 , 2554 and 2557 . Further, a ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball (so-called foul ball) that has been launched from the ball launching device 680 but has not reached the game area 5a. A foul ball sensor (not shown) that detects is provided, and the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) is calculated by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor. may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the discharged ball sensor 3060 or the fired ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of awarded balls. Also, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal play, during power supply, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls / the number of out balls for each game state. . By displaying the base on the role ratio indicator 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball putting performance from the design value during operation for each game machine on the spot. In addition, since the ball-putting performance can be confirmed without using a hole controller, inspection of each game machine can be easily performed during an on-site inspection of the game arcade.

The character ratio indicator 1317 displays information about other prizes and prize balls of the base (the number of prizes won to the general prize gate 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes to the start gate 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, The number of winnings to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The character product ratio display 1317 may always display the character product ratio, or may display the character product ratio by operating the display switch 1318 . For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the character ratio is started, and the display is turned off after being displayed for a predetermined time. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317. good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame is open, the character ratio display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Also, the display content may be changed for each operation of the display switch 1318 . For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the role ratio (total), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the role for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous role ratio (total), and the continuous role ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is reduced by 2. It may be displayed on the digit (Fig. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the role ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the role ratio according to the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (recent data display). (Fig. 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the upper two digits is switched to y6, which means the role ratio (total), and the role ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed in the lower two digits. Display (mid-term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 . That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff of the game arcade becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling nature of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, since the data of the number of winning balls is accumulated as the character ratio calculation/display data 13136, and the check code is abnormal, the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is erased, so that an incorrect character ratio is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, since the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the character ratio is erased under conditions other than the conditions for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate number of prize balls is retained. , can calculate the exact role ratio.

In addition, since the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by mistake due to the operation of the game hall staff. Since the product ratio calculation/display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the game arcade. In addition, since the amusement center cannot intentionally delete the data for character product ratio calculation/display, the reliability of the character product ratio to be displayed is increased, and concealment of a high character product ratio can be prevented.

[9. Show Base]
[9-1. Basic Configuration of Game Machine Displaying Base]
So far, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the character ratio has been described. Next, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described exclusively, but the character ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins at the starting port (the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004), a lottery based on random numbers is performed, and a special symbol variation display game is executed. . The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a relatively short time variation pattern (normal variation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easy to select when the number of reservations is large) Or, there are relatively long-time fluctuation patterns (variation patterns such as Super Reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error. However, if the variable display time is long, without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls number) has changed), it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls ) changes), calculate and display the base value. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that operates in this manner will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. A 7-segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, A base value is calculated and displayed in the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89). In the following description, the "renewal process for calculating the character ratio calculation" in step S81 of FIG. calculation/display processing”. 26, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128"; The description will be made by replacing the "character product ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation region update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update process, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is updated. do. In particular, the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). When the game state is during the special prize, it means that the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but the opening and ending times of the big win game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed during one big win, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right.

Furthermore, in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), in game states other than during electric sapo, a predetermined time after closing the start port 2004 (for example, until the ball that has won the start port is detected as an out ball) seconds required) may be included in the prize.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during operation of the condition device (for example, from the finalization of the jackpot pattern of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out balls other than those during the special prize, normal winnings (during the so-called big wins) to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening and closing member uses winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time and non-time saving time) to calculate the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being played). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can be switched between using the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for calculating the base value or not depending on the game state (whether a special prize is in progress or not). It will be. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means not counting the paid out prize balls in (the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value), It also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls according to the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Also, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small win) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short period of time, and since the game balls are less likely to win due to the short opening, there is no influence on the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit during a time other than the special prize (normal time) and open only the time when the possibility of winning the game ball becomes high. In this case, winning balls and winning balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins other than during the special prize may be used for calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation region updating process may be the number of prize balls determined to be put out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not there are prize balls, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls enter the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the suspension is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting ports is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a game state in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated due to the winning, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060 and the like. Get the number of balls=1. The total number of out-balls is recorded in the total number of out-balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (Fig. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge without delay whether the base is normal or abnormal.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46), which will be described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up. may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for notifying the base from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 may be sent.

Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of both the winning ball to the winning hole and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or the number of out-balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning to a plurality of winning holes is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to a plurality of winnings is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize-winning sensor detects a prize-winning hole with 5 prize balls and a prize-winning hole sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are detected as the total number of prize balls. (or add to the prize number buffer).

Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the shooting of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer). In addition, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to touch the contact detection sensor 509 with the palm or finger is counted as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected in the base value of the prize balls due to an abnormality in which the prize balls are detected in a state where the game balls are not shot or fraudulent acts, and to prevent an incorrect base value from being displayed. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of winning balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of winning balls due to the winning of the general winning opening and the starting opening are not counted even during the special prize. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out-balls, excluding the number of balls that have entered the big prize pool.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated each time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. In addition, if an abnormal base value is calculated (e.g., if the total number of balls won is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. good too. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded balls divided by the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of balls stored in divide input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated up to the 1's place in the hundredth fraction, and the fractions below the decimal point are not calculated. Also, if this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated to two decimal places in a fraction of 100. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the fraction of 100 with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the 32-clock wait time from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits without performing any other processing. may be performed. For example, the random number for judging the winning or losing of the jackpot may be updated between the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the reading of data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle supplied to the main control MPU 1311 (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle). is also updated with hard random numbers.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating random numbers for judging winning or losing. Also, during the calculation (division) process in the arithmetic circuit 13121, the random number that affects the game result is updated one or more times.

Also, if the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128 . In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify an abnormality of the base value. Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values.

There are various methods for base notification, and one or more of the methods described below may be used in combination. For example, the base value may be notified by the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. all the time or at a predetermined timing. Informing the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the role item ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the indicator or the display device described above. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. In display devices capable of displaying images, such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed for more detailed display. may

When displaying a base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317 . That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as the base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 by "data n setting", and sets the display content in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171 .

In addition, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow in each stage. In addition, when the base value is low, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage, such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm getting worse", "It's not bad", and "In a way it's amazing". If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being carried out. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. In addition, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, etc. may be used to notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no previously calculated base value, a base notification command may be generated for displaying on the liquid crystal display that base notification is not possible. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the effect device controlled by the sub-board can notify the state of the base. can be reduced. Further, by informing that the base display is impossible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, the abnormality of the base value can be known without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317 .

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317 . In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 should be used for constant notification. In addition, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, when the special symbol variation display game is finished while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) to be described later, outputting base information at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of winning balls and for each predetermined number of out balls) good.

The base information output from the external terminal plate 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. In addition, a signal having a length roughly indicating the calculated base value may be output (for example, a 30-millisecond pulse when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Also, the number of consecutive pulses roughly indicating the calculated base value may be output (eg, three consecutive pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

The base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command may not be generated when the base value is not updated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, etc., it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value, and notifies the player or the hall employee of the abnormality of the base value. may be notified.

Also, whether or not to inform the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because, if the base value is constantly reported to the player, the player's attention to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original enjoyment of the pachinko machine, may be neglected and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. is.

Also, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or to be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Also, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or fallen below during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. When the base value rises above a predetermined threshold value and when it falls, the effect may be changed in the same manner, or the effect may be changed in different manners.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls is updated in the base calculation area update process of step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process of step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), The prize number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In addition, the number of undischarged prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of undistributed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to transmit a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of undistributed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is transmitted to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, an abnormality in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when it is determined that the base value is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the predetermined threshold is exceeded. The game is not stopped even if it is determined as such, and the calculation processing of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, the special symbol variation display game includes short-time games such as normal variation and long-time games such as reach variation, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol variation display game. If the condition is met multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), depending on the calculation timing of the base value, it may take a long time to change the base value. This is because there is a possibility that the information necessary for hall operation will not be output at an appropriate timing, causing inconvenience to the hall.

Also, if the launched game ball does not enter the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value is lowered. In this state, the player is at a loss, so for example, additional effects to the effects performed on the liquid crystal (for example, effects related to wins and losses that are not related to changes in the base value, and effects that appear with changes in the base value) (Specific effects to be added), and notice effects with high expectations for big hits (among the effects that are not related to changes in the base value, notice effects with high expectations such as the next notice effect, and changes in the base value Of the specific effects that appear, a highly anticipated advance notice effect (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can be motivated to continue the game by alleviating the discomfort caused by not winning the starting slot and the general winning slot.

On the other hand, if most of the launched game balls enter the start hole or the general winning hole (if more than the average number of past winnings wins), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player receives more game balls than usual, so the player's disappointment is alleviated. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to a less expected effect.

[9-2. Variation of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, variations of the update timing of the number of awarded balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. An overview of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Number of prize balls calculated → Number of prize balls updated → Base value calculated → Payout command sent ・Figure 42: Number of prize balls calculated → Number of prize balls updated → Payout command sent → Base value calculated ・Figure 43: Number of prize balls calculated → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Fig. 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Fig. →notification of payout completion→update of the number of prize balls→calculation of the base value Note that the variations shown in FIGS. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. - Execute the display process (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the updating process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or You may omit either of the ball payout completion.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. to run.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display processing (step S89). The number of prize balls corresponding to the generated payout command may be used instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or You may omit either of the ball payout completion.

In addition, the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 .

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the number of winning balls buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of undistributed prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data of the number of undischarged prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or Award number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the main control board 1310 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls so as not to lose the data of the number of unpaid prize balls when a power failure occurs. Therefore, it is necessary to notify the completion of the ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of winning balls and the number of out balls, which are the parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processes shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the number of winning balls is updated when the winning opening sensor detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74). Also, in the process shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of prize balls is updated. Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the reception of the payout command is confirmed. Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be counted accurately due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after winning a prize in the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited to the number of winning balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether the ball is in the middle of a grand prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after entering the winning hole, the number of prize balls during the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base values are calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known from the game machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of undischarged balls, when the winning opening sensor detects winning of a game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which winning is detected is not counted. Add to the number of balls paid out. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the number of prize balls buffer for calculating the base value or the total number of prize balls may be updated. Also, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 .

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which winning is detected to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held in a payout control board 951.例文帳に追加In this case, each time a payout command is transmitted, it is preferable to update the number of prize balls buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value.

Also, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Although a predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, the upper limit may not be set. Moreover, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Also, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, without comparing the winning balls buffer value with the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) , steps S891 and S892 may be performed.

As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various times. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. FIG. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of winning balls ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out balls Calculation ・Figure 50 and Figure 51: When either the number of awarded balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process (FIG. 39), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the number of prize balls obtained is one or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813). Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the winning ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of winning balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is defined as a number of prize balls in a predetermined time period other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start opening, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute) sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges. Also, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, it is not necessary to add the number of prize balls acquired to the number of prize balls buffer in step S813. good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the abnormal number of prize balls. Also, an abnormality in the number of winning balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal May be used to calculate base values. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral controller 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from operation confirmation in the initial state. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped), and after the error notification is stopped, the original state is restored and the game is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output.
The main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are launched into the game area 5a, and all game balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting opening, so an abnormality in the number of prize balls is notified. It is preferable that the mode of alerting is a gentle mode (for example, a low volume or a low amount of light than a normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Also, the display time may be the same as or shorter than that of normal errors. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so that the abnormality is notified only for the predetermined number of shot balls. may Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of awarded balls in step S985. (ie, whether there is an abnormality in the base value). For example, if the number of winning balls exceeds the number of out-balls in a predetermined time, or if the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening is considered, a high percentage of out-balls (for example, 50% or more) wins. For example, if

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40) described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Also, in the base calculation region update process (Fig. 46), the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold value Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (Fig. is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value Th1.

Then, if the number-of-balls buffered value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation/display process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is calculated. Retain (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the number of prize balls buffer in the number of prize balls buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total number of prize balls), and use it to calculate the base value process. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and if 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general winning hole, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 are moved to the total number of balls to be used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 are left in the number of winning balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball buffer is used for calculating the base value when the prize ball buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold value Th1 next time. Also, although the threshold value Th1 has been described as 100, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a big win is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. If there are jackpots (e.g., 4-round and 8-round jackpots), it should be set to less than or equal to the minimum number of prize balls for the jackpot. In addition, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is preferable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to set the threshold Th1 to 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

It should be noted that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, Steps S891 and S892 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the winning ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or measured by the output of an RTC (real time clock).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined). In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

In addition, when the total number of out balls is 0, or when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of shot balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally played. Therefore, it is not necessary to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Also, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with a threshold of 1500%. Since the theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine in which the maximum number of prize balls per winning hole is 15 is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is Also in this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Also, the threshold for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the value read from the division result register A 131218 is used to fill the base calculation area 13128. It does not update and may not update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started operation. It may be initialized at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is obtained, so that fraud can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) do not enter the general prize winning opening 2001 and the start openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, an abnormality in the prize winning to the prize winning openings (the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004) which are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the number of out balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of determination in step S812, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation region updating process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up (step S824). step S825).

Also, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins a prize in the starting hole and a look-ahead effect is generated, and the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a mode different from the normal one (blinking display, red pending, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the prefetched hold will be a big hit, but the player will be disappointed if the special symbol variation display game fails. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in this embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing of generating the prize ball, so that the base value increased by the prize ball that has entered the starting hole is reported. That is, even if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect at the time of winning the starting hole, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the starting hole is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold value Th1 = 100) If not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (in some cases, only the lower value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display does not change). Therefore, even if the above-described look-ahead effect is missed, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the player is in good shape), and the loss of interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). In addition, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect and when the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. .

It should be noted that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, at the start of the game, the operation button 220C can be used for selection. Also, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay in the calculation of the base value. In addition, when the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game reaches the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the player wins the starting slot. Even in this case, since prize balls are paid out as a prize is won in the starting hole, the number of prize balls is counted and used for calculating the base value. In addition, even if you win a start gate or a general winning gate due to a specific error, it will be treated as no winning and if no prize balls will be paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted, and the base value will depend on the winning. is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is composed of 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Also, in the base calculation area updating process (Fig. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (Fig. 49), the number of out balls is specified by the flag. is equal to or greater than a threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation/display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). Steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started operation. may be initialized for each number of balls or for each predetermined number of out balls).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, may notify the base value with a specific effect, or may notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed each time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at appropriate timing. Also, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues amusement.

In addition, each time a prize ball is detected (detection of a prize, transmission of a payout command, arrival of a payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because there is a possibility that the base value cannot be calculated correctly if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the shot is not performed for a predetermined time (about one minute), the slinging (grape) state caused by the game ball being caught on a nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because they may win prizes. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out balls and the buffer value of the number of out balls are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out balls is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out balls may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the number of out pitches buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify an abnormality of the base value. Note that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated even if the base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG.

The data of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated in the base calculation area updating process and the base calculation/display process executed by the main control MPU 1311 (Figs. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the winning ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation - Read out in display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, 51, etc.). For this reason, base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing can be configured separately from timer interrupt processing (game control program). can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), winning ball number buffer, total winning ball number, out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer, specific winning ball number buffer, total out ball number and base are stored. The number of prize balls buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and when the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls) is used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player except during the special prize. The number of out balls buffer is the number of game balls shot by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out balls). be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won a specific general winning hole or starting hole. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls by the number of balls passing through the out hole (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls with the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls shot by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls/total number of out balls×100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total accumulation shown in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later. and can store values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later. It should be noted that a capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of a work area structure using a ring buffer. The structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B) stores winning balls buffer, total winning balls, out balls buffer, winning balls buffer, specific winning balls buffer, total out balls and base. Each data item is the same as described in FIG. 52(A). The storage areas for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored in n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time) (for example, each 6000 prize balls). n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of winning balls (the number of out balls, a predetermined time period, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area one before the write pointer. This is for calculating the base value using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the accumulated value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base total value is the total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls. is a value calculated from the values of recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total cumulative value calculated from the relevant cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer is Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data of the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of the data for 6000 prize balls.times.n (60000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of winning balls and the total number of out-balls are storage areas of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total sum is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Also, each of the base total and the total total is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), stored data is not erased, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 52(B) may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. All the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted in addition to the abnormal value. Also, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Base value display]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Since this is not possible, the power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced by turning off the 7-segment LED 13172 . Of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area updating process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Also, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318 . For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and the display is turned off after being displayed for a predetermined period of time. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that the base display 1317 can be confirmed to be operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is displayed (Fig. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , the power consumption of the game machine should be reduced. This base non-display state is in the same mode as after completion of the initial setting (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different mode as long as it can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317 . The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game is preferably continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, when the body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the base value is displayed, but when the body frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special pattern displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative pattern stops at the timing when the special pattern variable display of the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (character object ratio in the above-described embodiment) may be displayed on the base indicator (character object ratio indicator) 1317 . By doing so, the base value (accessory ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the gaming machine. Moreover, it is not necessary to determine whether the body frame 4 is open. In an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the base (character ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when the base value is displayed even when the body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form recognizable by the player (for example, on a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth watching by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310 , a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 . Also, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment does not change the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light on the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it will be difficult to confirm the base value on the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside the opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal variation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a moving image showing the motif of the game machine is reproduced, or the game machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demonstration state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that the demonstration state and the energy saving mode do not have to be distinguished). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 controlled by the peripheral controller 1511 and various lamps is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display device 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the pachinko machine as a whole. good too. Also, if the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who is going to play on an empty table can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if a game ball does not enter the starting gate or general winning gate, when a game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. have a nature. If game balls are shot and the number of out balls increases, but the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will take revenge.

By informing such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, the interest in the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed is maintained at the amount of light before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the amount of light is increased. It is good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, maintaining or increasing the light intensity of the display that displays the base value has been explained, but from the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption, even if the light intensity of the display that displays the base value is decreased or extinguished good. For example, during the energy saving mode, predetermined operations (fire stop button to forcibly stop firing, operation button to change the effect that appears, RAM clear button to clear the contents of RAM, power supply to the game machine It is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed when the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine, such as a supply adjustment button for switching between the presence and absence of the base value, is detected. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, if the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light amount of both the lamp that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode is reduced before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like, which consumes a large amount of power, is first reduced, thereby greatly reducing the power consumption. In addition, the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off prior to the lamp or the like. It works. In addition, the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. . Note that the terms before and after time (meaning "before" or "at the same time") in these descriptions include the order of internal processing timings and the order of appearance from the player's point of view.

Moreover, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. divided into multiple stages. The indicator for displaying the base value may be composed of a multi-color LED, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and at each stage, the base value is low Occasionally it may display self-deprecating comments. Further, an effect of adding a comment as described above may be performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed without changing the display mode of the display that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation region updating process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. FIG. In the processing described in FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 55 and Figure 56: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls The base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls will be omitted, but they can be realized by combining FIGS.

If out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 1021 provided near the out hole 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be counted accurately. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the out hole 1111, the general winning hole 2001, the starting hole 2002, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out hole are used to accurately calculate the number of out balls, and to accurately calculate the base value.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. Out mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of balls passing through the mouth is provided. The out-port-passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out-port 1111 . By installing the sensor 1021 for balls passing through the out hole at a position where the player can see through the out hole 1111, the player can be made aware that the out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

In addition, the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gathering gutter where the game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-hole 1111 are aligned. If it is installed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it, the player does not need to be aware of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the far side of the out-port 1111, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessories (movable bodies), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the rolling surface on which the game ball that has passed the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 rolls is provided so that the game ball that has passed through the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 does not bounce back. It should be slanted or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passed through the out hole, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passed through the out hole at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the outlet is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up. You may stop ball abnormality information.

After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out-hole is recorded in the out-ball number buffer, and the number of prize-winning balls is recorded in the prize-winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out hole is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Then, the obtained number of balls passing through the out-hole and the number of winning balls are added to separate storage areas (out-ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

Also, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 55, if the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning hole is won. Counting the number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are simultaneously executed (within one timer interrupt processing), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the buffer for the number of out balls and the buffer for the number of winning balls cannot be updated within one timer interrupt processing, whether the number of balls passing through the out port is preferentially counted or the number of winning balls is preferentially counted. should be determined in advance rather than being determined by lottery. In this case, if the process related to the prize balls is prioritized over other processes, the payout process of the prize balls can be executed quickly.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of passing balls stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out-balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the number of prize balls buffer value is added to the total number of prize balls (step S897), and the number of prize balls buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or at predetermined time intervals without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value for number of out balls + buffer value for number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls passed through the out hole, so the number of out balls is counted accurately, and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the prize winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the processing for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base Abnormality Notification]
The processing described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, the processing for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle. ・Figure 58: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated each time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated. The same method as the above-described base notification can be adopted as the method of notifying the abnormality of the base.

For example, one or a combination of two or more of the methods described below may be used. Specifically, base display (7-segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. Informing the player of the abnormality of the base value may allow the player to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. Abnormality of the base value may be notified by displaying the calculated base value in percentage notation on the above-described indicator or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. In display devices capable of displaying images, such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed for more detailed display. may

Further, when the base values are displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is preferable to change the display mode when the base values are abnormal. For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when abnormal, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple steps. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow in each stage.

In addition, various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, etc. may be used to notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Also, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls at the timing when the number of awarded balls and the number of out-balls satisfy predetermined conditions as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation region update processing to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of prize balls and total number of out balls using the acquired number of prize balls and number of out balls, as shown in, for example, FIG. 39 and FIG. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall staff can It is possible to know the possibility of illegal operation to the game machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and report abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies changes in calculated base values will be described.

The base value calculated by pachinko machines naturally fluctuates. Since the base value indicates the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game cares not only about the base value itself but also about changes in the base value. Therefore, it is desirable to inform the player of the change in the base value. The player can play the game with peace of mind when the display that serves as a reference for the upper and lower levels of the base value appears.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of past base values. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the time to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed out, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and every time the base value management timer times up, the current base value is stored in the base history. The base history is stored in base calculation area 13128 . Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 , or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 . When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, predetermined time×10 base values. Also, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for a predetermined time×n are stored, A base value may be calculated as needed.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, most recent base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease continuation time measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not passed since the base has started to decrease, the effect table for which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has passed from the start of the decrease of the base, the effect table for the continuation of the decrease of the base is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the timer for measuring the duration of the base decrease is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. You may Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base historical value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (eg, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game with a random number selected upon winning a prize in the starting port (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or when the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected during the base value decrease. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items of effect number, effect content, variable time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the effect. The remarks are information describing the outline of the presentation so that the designer can understand it. Distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (lost) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged, and the display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state and the base value is increasing or not changing. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a variable probability big win that derives a variable probability state and the base value is increasing or not changing.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

As shown, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 which are effects in which the pattern does not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after determination of the effect.

In addition, if the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started to decrease, the display selection table 3 is used to select an effect, and the selected effect is displayed. You can switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is always notified of the change in the base value, the player's attention to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original enjoyment of the pachinko machine, may be neglected and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variation display game is preferentially executed, and when the variation is not in progress, the base value is increased. It is preferable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guideline for a change in the base value) at the time of hour or at the time of descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension continues and fatigue accumulates. When the game ball wins in the starting hole while the specific effect is being displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the winning of the start slot triggers a big winning lottery and the special symbol variation display game is started, so it is better to make the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even when the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or when the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Also, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, or may be executed without fail if the same conditions are met.

Moreover, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value is increased, and is displayed only when the base value is decreased. This is because when a player is notified of a rise in the base value, the player's expectations rise, and if the base value does not rise to the extent that the player expects, the player may be disappointed due to the gap between expectations and expectations. be. On the other hand, if the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players will increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states: decreasing base value, steady state, and increasing base value. A selection table may be defined to inform the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Also, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when no game ball enters the starting hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Also, if the special symbol variation display game is not performed for a predetermined time, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a demo screen.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, the left and right symbols displayed on the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. In the central part of the screen, the player and the opponent are competing in rock-paper-scissors, and the middle pattern is determined according to the results of the rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of special ready-to-win 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed on the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. In the central part of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting each other, and the medium pattern is determined according to the result of the fighting.

FIG. 69(D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered to a position (for example, the lower right part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is displayed at a position (for example, the bottom of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease of the base value may be displayed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Also, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a pop-up display in the center of the display screen may be used.

An example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decoration lamp may be changed. Also, instead of showing the up-and-down trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value is the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. and the total cumulative sum of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of Base Considering Specific General Entrances]
Next, the process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of the winning in a specific general winning slot will be described.

In a pachinko machine, a player shoots a game ball with the aim of winning a prize in a specific winning hole (for example, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 that are open) in which the game ball is likely to win during the big win. Adjust the strength of the projectile. Even during a big win, the game ball is shot at the same place as the so-called normal hitting to aim at the big winning hole 2005, or the shooting strength is strengthened to the maximum, so-called right-hand hitting to aim at the big winning hole 2006. - 特許庁There are variations. Among such variations, there is a case where a game board is designed such that a starting hole or a general winning hole is arranged downstream of the big winning hole and the balls spilled from the big winning hole are picked up.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that hits to the right during a big win will be described in detail. During the big win, the player hits to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened big winning hole. Most of the game balls shot toward the game area enter the large winning opening 2006 that is open. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005. When the player does not win the special prize-winning slot 2006, he/she wins the general prize-winning slot 2001.例文帳に追加That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not enter the open big winning hole 2006 .

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (that is, the number of out balls paid out). In order to indicate the ratio of the number of prize balls that were put out), the number of balls that flowed into the game area but are unlikely to enter the start hole or the general winning hole (high possibility to enter the big winning hole) If the number of out-balls is counted, it is assumed that the base value will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. to calculate the base value.

An overview of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls Note that the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls will be omitted, but they can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72 .

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific number of winning balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific number of winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up. You may stop ball abnormality information.

After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 71, in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition, the number of prize balls is recorded in the number of prize balls buffer, and the number of out balls is stored. Record the number in the out pitches buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, and it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning hole is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball number recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation/display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of passing balls stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out-balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the number of prize balls buffer value is added to the total number of prize balls (step S897), and the number of prize balls buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same value, and if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out balls is updated, Base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls is updated, or at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, deviation from the actual base value is calculated. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

In addition, the pachinko machine that hits to the right during the big win has explained the case where the general winning hole 2001 is downstream of the big winning hole 2006, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 by normal hitting during the big win. It can be applied to a pachinko machine or a game machine in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

Also, in the game area 5a, big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls, but allow acceptance of game balls according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Prize balls that have won prizes in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the start openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the special symbols are confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big winning opening). During the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending), the detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of winning balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being executed in step S810 in FIG. 39 and the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one jackpot, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right. Furthermore, in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during power supply, a predetermined time after opening the starting port 2004 after closing (for example, until the ball that has won the starting port is detected as an out ball) seconds required) may be included in the prize.

Also, in the game area 5a, a second start port 2004 is arranged which normally does not accept game balls, but allows acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result of normal symbols. Prize balls that enter the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display game is started, and the normal symbol is confirmed and released (opening), from the second start port 2004. During the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending), the detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening may be included in the special prize. In this way, all winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value, not just during the time saving.

As described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than those during special prizes (jackpots, short working hours, etc.) without determining in step S810 of FIG.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of winning balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Also, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when neither the big win nor the time saving is in progress (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand during the big win or the time saving. In such a game machine, a general prize winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002 for winning a prize when hitting to the left and a general prize winning port 2001 and a second start port 2004 for winning a prize when hitting to the right are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning holes in the left to center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the right), Depending on the arrangement and the position of the nail, the ball entry rate to each winning hole is different. In other words, the base value for left-handed hitting and the base value for right-handed hitting are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player hits to the left in the normal state. However, if the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed for the reason described above (for example, the base value for right-handed is designed to be lower than that for left-handed in normal conditions). , a low base value is calculated when the player hits right in normal conditions.

A pachinko machine with a low base value is considered to be abnormal and should be inspected or judged to be a machine with poor ball output performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have poor ball output performance (lower than the expected base), the hole judges that the player is hitting left, so the starting opening that affects the base when hitting left Make adjustments to increase the ball entry rate of the general winning entrance. Then, adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. When the game machine adjusted in this way hits to the left, many prize balls can be obtained even in the normal state. In other words, many lotteries can be received with a small amount. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole has assumed, the hole misunderstands and adjusts to increase the ball entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that wins when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged by such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for hitting left and the base value for hitting right.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that hits to the right during time saving, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate part 2003 for performing the normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004 are used when hitting to the right. It is arranged in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by striking to the right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal pattern is performed, the probability of winning the normal pattern is extremely low to prevent the second start port 2004 from opening. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 2004 in a normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the normal state of hitting to the right, the rate of entry into the second starting hole 2004 should be increased. However, since the second starting hole 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting hole 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting hole 2004 will put pressure on the profit of the hole. Therefore, when calculating the base value by counting the number of game balls passing through the gate section 2003 in the normal state, it is preferable to calculate the corrected base value using the number of passing balls of the gate section 2003 .

Specifically, the number of game balls passing through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. A reduction in the number of out pitches allows for higher base calculations. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a very high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design values (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without entering the starting hole, etc.) (conditions may be added), the number of out balls counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 may not be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When passing through the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed" may be output without actively informing the player that the result will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passing of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the fact that the game is being played to the right may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade.

As described above, by excluding the number of balls passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the right) from the number of out balls, The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base due to the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value of confirming the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value is retained for a long period of time. Also, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily deleted. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the conditions for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 . As a result, it is possible to hold accurate data on the number of winning balls and to calculate an accurate role ratio.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1. All data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased by the second operation of shutting down. For the second operation, one switch may be provided to realize this operation, or the pachinko machine 1 may be operated by removing the connector of the backup power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 by an employee of the game parlor. may be turned off.

In other words, two operations are prepared for erasing the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, and the second operation erases the calculated base value. Delete all data, including data related to game progress.

By configuring in this way, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the game hall, so the reliability of the displayed character object ratio is increased, and concealment of a high character object ratio can be prevented. .

[9-10. Calculation of Base Considering Winning Abnormality]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in prize winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than during the opening of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the derivation of a big win in the special symbol variation display game, or when a winning is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, the starting port 2004 If winning is detected other than when the is open, it is a winning error. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly when many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is impossible or many winnings are detected within a predetermined period of time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to calculate the base accurately by correcting this amount. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process considering the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

It should be noted that normally the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 win prizes only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and they win prizes. No need to consider anomalies.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update process, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is updated. do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded balls is directly updated using the number of awarded balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation region updating process may be the number of prize balls determined to be put out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. In addition, the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951, and the payout control board 951 confirms receipt (ACK
) may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the received payout command. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid-out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls enter the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the suspension is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting ports is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a game state in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated due to the winning, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation region updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a winning to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is detected in addition to the special prize (while the condition device is in operation) caused by the derivation of the big win in the special symbol variation display game, or In the case where winning to the starting port 2004 is detected while the game is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality.

It may be determined that the winning ball is abnormal when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or it may be determined that the winning ball is abnormal when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined as a winning abnormality, and when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning abnormality. You may

Then, the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). The number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060, etc., as described above, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and obtained in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, winning a prize The number of winning balls that are abnormally applied may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out-balls is recorded in the total number of out-balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (Fig. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. It can be determined without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74), which will be described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up. may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for notifying the base from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 may be sent.

Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of both the winning ball to the winning hole and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or the number of out-balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning to a plurality of winning holes is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to a plurality of winnings is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize-winning sensor detects a prize-winning hole with 5 prize balls and a prize-winning hole sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are detected as the total number of prize balls. (or add to the prize number buffer).

Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the shooting of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer). In addition, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the shooting handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it was detected that the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 was in contact with the contact detection sensor 509 is the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected in the base value of the prize balls due to an abnormality in which the prize balls are detected in a state where the game balls are not shot or fraudulent acts, and to prevent an incorrect base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the number of out balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is obtained (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected for all the winning balls related to the winning abnormality. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball related to the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out. It is preferable that whether or not a prize ball is to be paid out in response to this prize winning abnormality is determined for each prize winning opening. In this case, in the case of a prize-winning abnormality in which no prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls should not be counted as total-out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, as for the prize winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are counted as total out balls, and the paid out prize balls are also counted as the total number of prize balls, and used for calculating the base value. Note that even in the case of a prize winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls may not be counted as the total out balls, the paid out prize balls may not be counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance (removal of jammed balls, etc.) for a game machine malfunction, a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting hole to compensate for the ball output so that the player does not lose money. In that case, a prize ball is paid out for winning a prize to the start hole. Winning to this starting port is detected as a prize winning abnormality, but prize balls are paid out. When prize balls are paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it should not be determined as a prize winning abnormality. In this case, in the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, prize balls are dispensed and abnormal winning is not determined. It is preferable to determine the winning abnormality without paying out. A winning hole for judging a winning abnormality has a smaller number of prize balls to be put out by winning than a winning hole for not judging a winning abnormality (three prize balls for a starting hole and 15 balls for a big winning hole). For this reason, although a winning abnormality is determined at the big winning opening, even if abnormal winning is not determined at the starting opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraud. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality that does not generate any prize balls, it is possible to match the number of prize balls with the out balls that cause the prize balls.

As described above, it is possible to determine a winning abnormality in various winning ports, but a specific implementation example for a pachinko machine will be described.

First, the normal winning gate 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning gate other than the general winning gate 2001 (large winning gates 2005 and 2006, starting gates 2002 and 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult for a plurality of game balls to win at the same time, the general prize gates are designed to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts. The player can be compensated for the put-out ball by entering the general prize winning openings 2001 (4 in total) which are provided more than three in total. In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by hall employees, maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and operation for compensating for ball output are easy. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general prize winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessories (large winning openings) 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004) and decorative members (appearance) are different. In addition, when the number of winning balls for one winning ball in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that it is also possible to determine the winning abnormality not only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end) but also for other general winning openings.

In addition, no prize-winning abnormalities are determined in the large prize-winning ports 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls, and prizes are won in prize-winning ports other than the large prize-winning ports 2005 and 2006 (general prize-winning ports 2001, starting ports 2002 and 2004 with a small number of prize balls). Abnormalities may be determined. Since the number of winning balls for one winning ball is large in the big winning hole, even a small number of winning balls greatly changes the base value. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change of the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that, instead of determining the winning abnormality only in a specific big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 2005 where the game ball is easy to put in by hand), the winning abnormality may be determined in other big winning openings (for example, 2006). .

Further, the winning abnormality may not be determined at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the winning abnormality may be determined at the winning ports other than the starting ports 2002 and 2004 (general winning port 2001, big winning ports 2005 and 2006). Since the number of winning balls for one winning ball is smaller than that of the big winning hole, the starting hole can compensate the player for the ball while improving the security resistance of the game machine against the goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific start opening (for example, the start opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand), and the other start opening 2004 may be used to determine the winning abnormality.

Furthermore, in the case of the big winning opening and the start opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member can be easily operated by hall employees. Instead, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located at a position that cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member may be difficult for hall employees to operate. For example, by tilting the opening and closing member that is positioned vertically in the closed state to an oblique position, it is easy for hall employees to operate a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening and closing member picks up game balls. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed with a flat plate member, and when the flat member is retracted, the entrance to the winning opening opens (so-called Velochu). is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning holes used to compensate the player for putting out balls, so it is easy for hall employees to understand, and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Also, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the abnormal prize may be the same as the method of notifying the abnormal number of prize balls described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal, Lighting or flashing of decorative lamps, output of voice, sound effect, warning sound, etc.) should be looser than other abnormalities. Specifically, the abnormal notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light up when the abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is set to a lower volume than other abnormal notification sounds (suppressed). ).

In addition, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the detection of the winning abnormality. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine, not the player's fraudulent act. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the work efficiency can be improved without interfering with the maintenance work of the game machine by the hall. In addition, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not hindered and the work is continued correctly. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the sound notification (or reduce the volume) while continuing the notification by the display device or the lamp.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has correcting means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correcting means classifies a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting hole, big winning hole). However, for the first type of winning opening, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected while a predetermined condition is not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning opening, a predetermined number of winning balls are detected. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is established (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviation of the number of out balls when compensating the player for maintenance of the gaming machine, and to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the game machine, and the base value can be adjusted as the adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the winning balls will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls determined to be abnormal should not be reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value.

In addition, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be reported. For example, in the fraudulent act detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the abnormal winning may be performed when one abnormal winning ball is detected, or when a predetermined number of abnormal winning balls are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning are continuously detected, the notification of the abnormal winning may be performed, and when a predetermined number of the winning balls related to the abnormal winning are detected within a predetermined time, the abnormal winning is notified. Notification may be made.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the winning opening is opened next time (the condition device is activated).

It should be noted that it is not necessary to report the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base Value Calculation Processing Utilizing Characteristics of Arithmetic Circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division processing for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processing than when the CPU 13111 executes division by a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), in the switch input processing (step S74), detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). Thereafter, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

Thereafter, in the base calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated by referring to the number of winning balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Although timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, it is necessary to complete the predetermined processing for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division processing by the program, the timer interrupt processing includes the time-consuming processing. In other words, it was difficult to include base calculation processing multiple times in timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, by performing division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt processing, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

In addition, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively used, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor is separate from the output timing of the quotient, the flexibility of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), so description of the same processing will be omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Specifically, it reads the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects fraud, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020, and determines the number of out balls. to count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation processing 1, the total number of out-balls counted in step S74 is used to update the total number of out-balls, and the base value is calculated. The details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation processing 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. The details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors A control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96).
). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished, and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

After that, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or base value abnormality) is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the display device (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 or the speaker 921 is used to notify the base value. and sound output commands. Also, when notifying with the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED elements. is the drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. Also, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). In addition, when the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Furthermore, when the total number of prize balls is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of awarded balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed in timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute longer than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of winning balls.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer. The ball count buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 ends.

On the other hand, if the buffer value for the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the buffer value for the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705), and the buffer for the number of out balls is set to 0. set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and whether there are prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls obtained is 1 or more. (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). The ball count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, a lot of prize balls in a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start opening, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the winning ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of winning balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of awarded balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so that the abnormality is notified only for the predetermined number of shot balls. may Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95). are omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the number of out balls counted in step S74 is used to update the total number of out balls, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the number of prize balls counted in step S80 is used to update the total number of prize balls, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. The details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors A control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and executes base display processing to generate a command for informing the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing step S9813 and subsequent steps from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). In addition, when the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. , and the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, one minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of winning balls.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during a special prize, the base value is not calculated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer. The ball count buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 ends.

On the other hand, if the buffer value for the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the buffer value for the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705), and the buffer for the number of out balls is set to 0. set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing step S9813 and subsequent steps from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and whether there are prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls obtained is 1 or more. (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). The ball count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time period other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening and the start opening, 10 or more prizes are won per minute). For example, if It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the buffer value of the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the number of prize balls may be stored in 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the winning ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of winning balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. , and the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S9807 of base calculation processing 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the abnormality of the prize ball for the predetermined number of shot balls. good too. Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit Input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the circuit 13121 . Specifically, the timing of writing the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt process, or before the random number update process (step S78), or in the special design or normal design. Before the control process (steps S86 and S88) is preferable.

Further, whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value may be determined based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls for calculating the base value. For example, the winning ball in the winning hole that gives the maximum winning ball to one winning ball may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) given when a game medium determined for each prize winning port provided in the game area wins is 1, 3, or 3. In the case of three types of 1 and 5, the maximum number of 5 winning balls and the number of out balls corresponding thereto may not be used for calculation of the base value. This is because if a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the calculated base value will change greatly, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.) ), the displayed value may change frequently. This is because, in such a case, it is difficult for the pachinko hall to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as set).

Also, the minimum number of one winning ball and the corresponding number of out balls may not be used for calculating the base value. Since the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded off even if the single prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value. This is because the displayed base value may not change if the displayed value is rounded (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), and processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

In addition, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum have been described, it is not necessary to use an intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and the minimum for calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum numbers of winning balls are used to calculate the base value, the number of winning balls and the number of out-balls representing the operation of the pachinko machine as a whole are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum values, A base value can be indicated.

Although three types of prize ball number patterns have been described, the patterns are not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types and seven types may be used.

In addition, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1, the middle value of 3, the maximum value of 5, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, such winning will be All winnings in the game state when detected need not be used in calculating the base value. For example, if the winning to a winning hole that gives five balls is not used for calculating the base value, in the game state in which the winning to the winning hole is detected, until the game state ends, the winning Winnings in mouths or other winnings should not be used to calculate base values. Moreover, even after the start of the game state, winnings in the relevant winning opening and other winning openings are not retroactively used for calculation of the base value.

In addition, when the game state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning may not be used for calculating the base value, and the game state when the winning is detected transitions to another game state. Winnings up to 2000 do not have to be used to calculate the base value. This is done by not using the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the game state in which the base value to be calculated changes greatly, in calculating the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility of a delay in the judgment of

When the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum or intermediate) prize ball for one winning ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process of not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls for calculating the base value will be described, depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for the calculation of the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the calculation processing of the base value is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and is excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base value. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Also, if none of the detected winnings are used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 need not be executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 to be excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). , the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If none of the detected prize winnings are used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 3 (step S93), base calculation processing 4 (step S94) and base display processing (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. may

The method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls may adopt the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning explained in FIGS. 73 and 74.

In this case, it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning prize is to be used for calculating the base value. In step S93) and base calculation processing 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether a prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value, the processing can be executed without skipping. can be confirmed. In addition, by not executing the processing for calculating the base value and not updating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processing (lottery processing, processing for determining the variation pattern, etc.) is executed accurately. can.

That is, even if there are multiple prizes with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest prize is awarded to the player, it is not used for calculating the base value, and the base value is displayed without any change due to the awarding of the prize. be. Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is given is terminated.

[9-12. Another configuration of the game machine displaying the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

The board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is, as described above, the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 that detects game balls passing through the out-hole 1111 provided at the bottom of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557 The total number of out balls is the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 .

When both the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting result of the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two counting results. An error may be notified when there is a difference of a predetermined value or more. Also, an error may be reported when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs between two count results within a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and as described later, the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and final section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals ( 99), the display switch 1318 may be operated to display the base value or switch the display contents.

Configurations other than those described above are the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism for aligning out-balls in a row in the ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board and counting out-balls with one frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B. . A game ball rolling in the game area 5 a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111 , the general winning port 2001 , the big winning ports 2005 and 2006 . The body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 for causing discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in a front view and to be aligned in a line. The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are made to flow down in two rows and counted by a plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060 . A game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the start ports 2002 and 2004, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 for causing the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be aligned in two lines. Each of the two frame-side discharge ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each row.

The frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. Also, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the body frame 4 .

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the ejected ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to connector 13101 provided on main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU1311.

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is connected to the main control board 1310. It is preferable to be provided on the lower side of the

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected-ball sensor 3060B is connected are separately provided. The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310 . The output line of the frame side ejection ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may

Also, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030 . The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as will be described later using FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5. FIG.

The magnetism detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of the sensors that detect winnings to the various prize-winning ports 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (star positions in the figure). provided in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a dashed line on the game board 5 and is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111 . This is to prevent calculation of incorrect base values. That is, when the player brings the magnet closer to the out port 1111 to operate the discharged ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value is lowered. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is sometimes subjected to maintenance work so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value at the game parlor. In a pachinko machine which has undergone maintenance work based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls put out in a normal state is increased, so that the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual and can obtain a lot of put out balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such an illegal payout of balls. In addition to the vicinity of the outlet 1111, the magnetic sensor 1030 may be provided at a location where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030 as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejection ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected in a sufficient range to cover the plurality of ejection ball sensors 3060. FIG. Also, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 may include other prize-winning outlets (for example, the big prize-winning outlet 2005 provided above the outlet 1111).

FIG. 92 shows a structure of main control input circuit 1315. Referring to FIG. The main control input circuit 1315 includes the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the winning opening sensors (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second big winning opening Sensor 2554, second lower grand winning opening sensor 2557, etc.), the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332 . The interface circuit 1331 level-converts or shapes (for example, eliminates chattering) signals input from various sensors, and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311 .

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signals level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 are output from terminals Y1 to Y8 and buffered. It is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. FIG. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311 .

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The anomaly detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (eg, 4 V) or a predetermined threshold (eg, power supply voltage - 0.1 V), it detects a disconnection of the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit of the switch, and if the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, an abnormal signal E , and outputs a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality of the power supply is detected. At the same time, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals, each sensor outputs a signal at an OFF level from the Y1 to Y8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process the input signal based on whether or not the power supply of the switch has decreased. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal at a level that turns each sensor off can be output.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of discharged balls, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value. Output an anomaly signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. FIG. FIG. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93(B) shows the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 connected to one An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317 and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95(A) is a front view of main control board 1310 housed in main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333 . Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the functional display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 .

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333 . Display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 .

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 . Signal lines for outputting display data from the main control MPU 1311 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 should preferably be arranged so as not to cross signal lines for reset signals and clock signals.

Connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above main control board 1310 . The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A, but also to the output lines from the other prize winning opening sensors 3015 and 2104 and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 . Connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below main control board 1310 . Signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332 .

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310 arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317. FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board that constitutes the main control board 1310 from the back side. Solid lines are patterns on the back side, dashed lines are patterns on the component surface side, and dotted lines are components mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. indicates The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the cathode side segment of each digit of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317. connected to the terminal.

Some of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333) and passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

A chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) receives the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311. , the data for controlling blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). Also, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base indicator 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting. The data line between the base indicator 1317 frequently changes levels. In particular, a large current flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base indicator 1317 to drive the LED elements. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal cross each other, the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal will have noise, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur in the intersection of wiring patterns on the front and back surfaces of the printed circuit board, or in the intersection of wiring patterns on inner layers and surface layers (front and back surfaces).

Specifically, when a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 is reset during the game, and the game may stop or the game state may be erased. . It should be noted that if the game state is erased at a timing that cannot occur originally, normal power failure processing will not be executed and will be reset. The game ends in the middle, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is erased.

The main control board box 1320 is partly lower in height and higher in other parts depending on the height of the components attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. It's becoming For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 is tall, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and short components such as ICs are mounted thereon (tall components cannot be placed). It should be noted that the main control board box 1320 is tall, and hatching indicates a region where tall components can be mounted. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or lower than the surface into which the mating connector is inserted (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is recommended that the insertion and removal of cables (connectors) to be connected to the board of the board should not be hindered.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the act of mounting illegal parts (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display is placed at a position where it is difficult for the player to see the display contents. A display 1317 is preferably arranged. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirming the presence or absence of game balls in the supply tank), if the player can visually recognize the display contents of the base display 1317, the player can In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317, so the player may ask for an explanation of the display contents of the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the display contents. In addition, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from players. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out-balls at maximum, but since the base value differs from the base value in a short-time game played by the player, complaints about the ball-out rate may arise. There is By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the character product ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable that the character product ratio display 1317 is arranged at a position where the display content is difficult for the player to see.

As shown, the base indicator (7-segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in the low height area of the main control board box 1320 .

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are configured by light-emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be configured by lamps (light bulbs) or other light-emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400. do.

As previously mentioned, main control I/O port 1314 includes latch circuit 1333 and driver circuit 1334 .

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334 .

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 captures the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1-I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1-O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs forming the base indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400. FIG.

For example, in order to light the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) loads the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Also, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317 is turned on. driven.

In addition, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) to the segment data (LOW when lit) at the rising timing of CS2. ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken in the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rise timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the anode common type, current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, when the segment is lit, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V), and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are. A signal may be output from one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary number data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 through separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of common data.

The display data for the base display 1317 and the display data for the function display unit 1400 are generated by different processes within the timer interrupt process and output at different timings within the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output display data to the base display device 1317 . On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400 . These data are generated by different programs (codes) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and is preferably executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the same timing, control data common to the two codes may be used to control the transmission timing of the common signal so as not to overlap. For example, a common counter is provided that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is 4 to 7, control is performed to output a common signal to the base indicator 1317 .

The processing of outputting the common signal and the processing of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at the timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and base display 1317 . In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display provided outside the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 shows the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram of an example that is used; The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400. do.

As previously mentioned, main control I/O port 1314 includes latch circuit 1333 and driver circuit 1334 . Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) to the segment data (low when lit) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

Thus, by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is lowered, the board size can be reduced, and the board unit (including main control board 1310 and main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if parts can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 configured with a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board must be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart for an example configuration of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, dotted lines perpendicular to the time axis indicate divisions of timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) outputs common data (when driving) corresponding to the digits indicated by D1 to D4. is HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) outputs segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8. output to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 .

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit on the base indicator 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) outputs the segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base indicator 1317 is lit.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described processing, and outputs digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, segment data are time-divided and output, and the common common data is used to display the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIGS. 93(B) and 97, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, so that the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, , the adoption of a multi-layer board and the close arrangement of components) can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310 .

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 with common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be 1317 outputs the segment data at a different timing. Therefore, while controlling both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by a common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data for the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data for the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is equal to the display time of the base display 1317. be longer. This is done by lengthening the lighting time in one cycle of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility caused by direct lighting of the hall. This is to prevent In addition, since the base indicator 1317 is arranged on the back side, which is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the base indicator 1317 is less affected even if the LED emits light at a low luminance. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is made higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

In contrast to the above, the display data for the base display 1317 is output first, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display data for the base display 1317 is displayed on the function display unit 1400. It can be longer than hours.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) involved in base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, provisional section display and fixed section display are switched at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and displayed. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, the base value A can be displayed so as to be 0% or 100%.

Also, in the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 6000), the upper two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking (e.g., cycle 0.6 seconds (Repeatedly turned on for 0.3 seconds and turned off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that an accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the upper two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, the upper two digits indicate that the base value B is displayed by lighting up “bb.” The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base indicator 1317 is two, the base value B can be displayed so as to be 0% or 100%.

In the first section, the base value is not measured because the previous section is the test section. For this reason, in the fixed section display, the upper two digits are indicated by blinking "bb." and the lower two digits are indicated by blinking "--".

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base value is not calculated for a predetermined number (for example, 256) of less than 500 out balls since the power is turned on for the first time as a test section. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on for the first time and a predetermined number of shots are fired, the ball output may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. . Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, the upper two digits are displayed as "bA." and the lower one digit is displayed as "--". , displays “--” in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits of the base indicator 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that an accurate base value cannot be measured. It should be noted that the base value may be indefinite without calculating the base value in the test section and displaying the calculated base value on the base display 1317 .

Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is completed, or immediately after the initialization of the base calculation work area (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. state. Further, the time of power-on generally used in this specification means the time of power-on other than the first power-on.

Further, all the LEDs of all digits of the base display 1317 may flash for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

In addition, in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, if an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the number of all out balls reaches 52000 in all game states (during jackpot, normal game, time saving, non time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.), the next section , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the number of out balls in one day, may be used as the number of out balls in one section. A round number of 50000 or 100000 may be adopted.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the number of out-balls in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls for one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310 . Furthermore, if the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or from the beginning of the current section. good. Since the pachinko machine is often operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means capable of setting the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation set by the setting means is used. , the length of one section is set.

An example of displaying the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured as the final section display will be explained. You may At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → the fixed section 3 at predetermined time intervals, by operating the separately provided display changeover switch, the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → The confirmation section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the upper two digits of the base display 1317 in the definite section display are not "bb." It should be displayed differently.

In this manner, the base display 1317 switches between the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of one or a plurality of immediately preceding sections at predetermined time intervals. In addition, a part of the base display 1317 displays a distinguishable display content, and the other part displays the measured base value.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317. FIG.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking segments of each digit. 0 to 9 can be displayed as numbers, and alphabetic characters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and - can also be displayed as letters. In addition, decimal points can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed together with the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of initialization processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is different from the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, except that the check code calculation processing (step S50) and the check code storage processing (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. 21 and 22, the same steps as those of the initialization process described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has passed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. area other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20) , a RAM error (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAM do not match, and an error in the work for base calculation (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality and RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area ) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are erased under different conditions for each type of data (game control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, thereby preventing the base calculation area 13128 from being erased by the operation of the game hall attendant, thereby preventing the abnormal base value from being concealed. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the main control MPU 1311 executes power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing, the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) initializes various setting registers (step S28), peripheral control board A power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmission to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processes including timer interrupt process is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 for the checksum calculation result. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the main board side power-off process. By storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in this way, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be saved even when the power is shut off. can be stored and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), it waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the character product ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a partial area of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the number of all out balls, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls.

The base value A storage area consists of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area for the base value B consists of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. It should be noted that the interval counter should be controlled to be any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to exceed 2. Specifically, the section counter is 0 in the test section, the section counter is 1 in the first section, and the section counter is 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Also, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so as not to exceed 255, and the section counter will be 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out-balls consists of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out-balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). Total out pitches are used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measure. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured for each section, with the operation of approximately one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the number of all-out pitches. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the game state for each section. total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out-balls for calculating the base value (the number of out-balls in the game state other than during the special prize) Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the game state other than the special prize) Store. In addition, the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the same number of bytes It is preferable to

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

When providing the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 , storage areas having the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312 .

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. Object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 ( 103) is updated, and the base value is calculated (step S801). The details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors control processing ( Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, second When there is an abnormality in the ball sensor (board-side ball sensor 3060A, frame-side ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is judged that there is an error that cannot be done. In addition, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is accurately determines that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base indicator 1317 may be extinguished. In step S8011, for an error that accompanies the game stop (eg, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.), it is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (eg, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) It may be determined that there is no error (NO) for failures that are not directly related to the calculation of the base (out of supply, full-tank error, etc.). In other words, the base calculation process may be executed even if some of the multiple types of abnormal conditions exist, and the base calculation process may not be executed if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060 and the like. Get the number of balls=1. When out-balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out-balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is obtained. The number of prize balls obtained in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process advances to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out-ball is detected, the detected out-ball number is added to the total number of out-balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether it is currently in the test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is the initial value of 0. It's becoming Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined to be a test section. If it is the test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during the special prize (step S8019). Whether or not a special prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 in FIG. 39 described above. When the game state is during the special prize, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big win, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but it includes the opening and ending time of the big win game. may When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed during one big win, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right.

Furthermore, in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during power supply, a predetermined time after opening the starting port 2004 after closing (for example, until the ball that has won the starting port is detected as an out ball) seconds required) may be included in the prize. In addition, the so-called "hidden game state" that is in a high probability game state but does not become a time saving (during power supply) is not included in the special prize, and in the same game state as the normal state (low probability, non-time saving state) The base value may be calculated using the number of winning balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the hidden game state, and the base value may be displayed so as to be identifiable as to which base is displayed.

The hidden game state is a game state in which even if the probability is high, the player does not recognize that it is a high probability state. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that he is in a hidden game state (that is, a high probability). In other words, in the frame open state, the player can know the game state by whether the base display changes when the staff of the hall repairs the ball in the winning hole or throws the ball in the out hole. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the hidden game state.

On the other hand, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in a low-probability/non-time-saving state for the operation of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value while excluding the latent gaming state. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state. In other words, since the normal game state and the hidden game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during operation of the condition device (for example, from the finalization of the jackpot pattern of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out balls other than those during the special prize, normal winnings (during the so-called big wins) to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening and closing member uses winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time and non-time saving time) to calculate the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being played). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can be switched between using the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for calculating the base value or not depending on the game state (whether a special prize is in progress or not). It will be.

Also, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small win) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short period of time, and since the game balls are less likely to win due to the short opening, there is no influence on the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit during a time other than the special prize (normal time) and open only the time when the possibility of winning the game ball becomes high. In this case, winning balls and winning balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins other than during the special prize may be used for calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, the out-ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out-balls detected in step S8014 should be used for base calculation. The number of out-balls given is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, when an out ball or a prize ball other than during a special prize is detected, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process relating to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball has been detected, it is determined whether the current game state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for base calculation, so it is detected as the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The awarded number of balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, out balls or prize balls other than during the special prize are detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls is low probability/non-time-saving out ball The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether it is in the test section (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates that it is a test section, If the number of all-out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the time to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is during the test section and the timing is for ending the test section, the process advances to step S8032 to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is terminated and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and that the game is not in the test section, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of all out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the number of all out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is 52000 or more, the section ends and a process for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it to the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled to be any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to exceed 2. Therefore, when the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter The interval counter value is not incremented and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the period of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It should be longer enough. This is because if the blinking and display switching are at the same period, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand. This is for making it easy to understand whether it is switching or not.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the process of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). If the check code is a fixed value without calculating it, it is preferable to use a multi-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value. to). Moreover, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, the areas may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. If the check code is a fixed value, it should be composed of a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

Thus, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( can be displayed in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. In addition, the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126. Even if calculated, the effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

Also, regarding the prize balls, if the base value is calculated and displayed using the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning signal generated, the timing of calculating and displaying the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out will differ. is different. In other words, a state in which an abnormality occurs in the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, top tray is full, failure of the payout count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, failure of the payout motor, etc.) stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the base calculation process described above, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the number of prize balls calculated each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval before and after is calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up. may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called from step S8035 of the base calculation process and executed.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have passed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, and the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 1250 to 2499. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every five seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether it is currently in the test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section
is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is equal to or greater than 1250, data for displaying "bb." After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past definite section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest defined section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). And if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is less than 6000, the number of operations (number of out-balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, so the base value may not be stable. Control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 blinks (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base indicator 1317 is controlled to light up without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is equal to or greater than 2499, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) that is executed at predetermined time intervals, by switching the display content on the base display unit 1317 using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, the current The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since the blinking display is performed in the range in which the base value is not stable in each section, whether the base value is in the stable range or not can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317.例文帳に追加

FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of base calculation processing. The modified example shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except for the addition of base calculation work check processing (steps S8012 and S8013). In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation processing will be described, but the processing from steps S8028 to S8038 is the same as in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processing (from step S8014 onwards) is the same as in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal at each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds). display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for judging abnormality of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is called the "base calculation area 13128"). read), and it is determined at a predetermined timing whether the data is normal. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normality/abnormality determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
106 and 108: The check code calculated by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is judged by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(Case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
101 and 106, the process of judging the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described.

101 and 102, and the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 105 and 106), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Also, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined using a check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value starts from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128 . After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
21 and 22, the process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described.

Assuming that the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Also, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using a check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described.

108 and 106, a check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

Also, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using a check code whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

In this case, abnormalities in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

If a fixed value is used instead of the checksum for the check code, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Also, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used as the check code for determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the game state is switched.

One game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, and after that, the variable display game of a predetermined number of times is finished, the time saving state is finished, and the normal state is restored. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004 which is open.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning to the starting port 2004. - 特許庁That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to any winning to the starting port 2004 as shown.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the start port 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls.

In the above description, the end of the time saving state has been described, but the same applies to the end of the probability variation by ST.

A similar phenomenon occurs when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variation display game, in addition to the end of the time-saving state described above. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then a big hit state starts, and the game ball wins the starting port 2004 during opening.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variable and displayed in relation to the winning of any starting port 2004 . On the other hand, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time-saving out ball number, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time-saving out balls.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while opening the starting port 2004 (electric tulip), a specific error occurs after that, and the game ball wins the starting port 2004 during opening. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that makes it impossible to accurately calculate the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the out Do not use spheres in base calculations.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variable and displayed in relation to the winning of any starting port 2004 . On the other hand, since the out ball during the occurrence of a specific error is not used for base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls, but the second winning ball is not added to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won during operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (time saving end, special symbol variation display game jackpot occurrence, specific error occurrence, etc.) There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning prize.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the prefetch effect of the pending special symbol variation display game, the first prize won in the time saving state to the start port 2004 is not subject to the prefetch effect, and in the normal state The second prize that has been won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize winning in the time saving state to the start port 2004 may be targeted for the look-ahead performance, and the second prize winning in the normal state may not be targeted for the look-ahead performance.

In addition, although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric sapo state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311 regarding storage areas.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, and FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding storage areas in detail.

In the main control MPU 1311, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 are provided as storage areas for storing data. The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 only temporarily stores data when the CPU 13111 executes the program (for example, a flag indicating the state of the operation result, the execution state of the program, data input/output to/from the CPU 13111, etc.). The internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, random values updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and intermediate values in random value update calculations. Also, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the jump destination address are temporarily stored in the internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of signals input from the switches, detection results of edge information) are temporarily store in

In addition, when a random number is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area at the time of winning the starting opening, the random number is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1312. memorize to In addition, when obtaining a random number at the time of starting entrance winning and performing a look-ahead judgment (hitting judgment at the time of starting entrance winning) based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random value stored in the reserved storage area may be read (again) to any storage area of the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 to perform the prefetch determination.

The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from a memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name of each storage area included in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 (for example, Area0). . The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) each having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes). The access from the processor core 13141 is enabled for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group with one CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0 and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but any number of groups of two or more may be used. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage area (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data during program execution, and one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. , and it can be used even if a plurality of them are set (for example, 2 bytes=16 bits as a set of Area0 and Area1). Therefore, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without causing excess capacity in the storage area. In addition, the storage area (Area6) is set as a storage area to be used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by dividing it into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured with storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and storage areas that can be used in arbitrary combination are provided, so that storage areas are properly used according to the application (for example, data length) in arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, one (or a combined set) of storage areas can be addressed. Therefore, the number of arguments of the instruction can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches groups of storage areas accessible by the processor core 13141 according to the values stored in the switching register 13144 .

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145 , and is an area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 . The switching register 13144 stores, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching between four areas), an error flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally, (If the error flag is set, the switching instruction will be executed again), and an unauthorized access flag that is set when an error occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. good.

Also, the switching register 13144 may store flags (for example, carry flag, parity/overflow flag, zero flag, sign flag, etc.) representing the state of the operation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction before proceeding to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

Then, by the PUSH instruction, save the data of the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation processing by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction causes the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be used in the base calculation process of the callee from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller. Switch to Group 1. In this way, a single CHANGE instruction can switch a plurality of storage areas for each group, and a single instruction (that is, a small number of steps) can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas.

Also, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in timer interrupt processing to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312 to save the stack pointer value. After that, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process ends (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process. return. In general, the instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction to restore the data saved in the stack have different roles. By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

In this way, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145 .

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP command. The data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21) is returned to.

It should be noted that interrupts may be inhibited by a DI instruction at the beginning of timer interrupt processing, and interrupts may be permitted by an EI instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag without relying on the DI or EI instruction, interrupts may be prohibited when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

In addition, since timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the DI instruction disables interrupts in order to disable interrupts when interrupts are enabled for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above example, saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the caller, and switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and switching of the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the callee. One process may be executed by either the caller or callee when the process moves outside the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in timer interrupt processing of the calling source will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction before proceeding to the base calculation process. By interrupting between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, the base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during that period.

Then, by the PUSH instruction, save the data of the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used for timer interrupt processing of the caller to group 1 used for base calculation processing of the callee. In this way, a single CHANGE instruction can switch a plurality of storage areas for each group, and a single instruction (that is, a small number of steps) can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas.

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation processing by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312, and the stack pointer value evacuate. After that, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, step S80 in FIG. 105 or FIG.
11 is executed. After the base calculation process ends (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the called base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller timer interrupt process, and the POP instruction causes the game The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 . The data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, by restoring the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process is called. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21) is returned to.

In the same manner as described above, the DI instruction may be used to inhibit interrupts at the beginning of timer interrupt processing, and the EI instruction may be used to enable interrupts at the end of timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag without relying on the DI or EI instruction, interrupts may be prohibited when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

In addition, since timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the DI instruction disables interrupts in order to disable interrupts when interrupts are enabled for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example of switching timer interrupt processing, base calculation processing, and auxiliary storage area 13145 has been described, but inspection processing executed by debugging (inspection function) code 13133 may also switch auxiliary storage area 13145 . In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by the CHANGE instruction at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 . In addition, initialization processing (steps S10 to S34 in FIG. 21), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21). , timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23, 75, 80, etc.), and the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to use different auxiliary storage areas 13145 for each process.

Furthermore, if only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, the processing executed within the game control area (eg, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (eg, debugging ( Inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc.) processing (e.g., debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) to be executed by switching the auxiliary storage area 13145, and using different auxiliary storage areas 13145 inside and outside the game control area good too.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing. At the start of processing (eg, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing) temporarily store the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the game control stack area 13137, at the end of the timer interrupt processing (eg, at the end of the timer interrupt processing) It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 .

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, saving to the stack area one unit (byte or word) at a time increases the number of instructions for saving. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area is incorrect, different data will be read from the stack area, and subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. . Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, It can solve the above problem.

Furthermore, if the entire storage area of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is saved to the stack area, the stack area may overflow and data outside the area reserved for the stack area (stack area for other purposes, etc.) may be rewritten. be. For this reason, in addition to the instruction to store all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area collectively, there is an instruction to collectively save a plurality of storage areas specified arbitrarily from the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area. Alternatively, an instruction may be provided and executed to collectively restore data to a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area.

In this way, it switches to another auxiliary storage area 13145 when moving to the process outside the game control area, and switches to the original auxiliary storage area 13145 when moving to the process within the game control area, so stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 The processing can proceed without saving the received data to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area).

In addition, when moving to the process outside the game control area, save the switching register 13144 to RAM1312 (for example, stack area), and when moving to the process within the game control area, restore the switching register 13144 from the RAM1312, The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without recovering from the RAM 1312 .

Also, when moving to the process outside the game control area, switch to another stack area, and when moving to the process within the game control area, switch to the original stack area, so the stack area used in the process within the game control area , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

In addition, the value stored in the switching register 13144 when moving to the process outside the game control area is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area), and the value saved when moving to the process within the game control area is used for switching. Since it restores to the register 13144, the value regarding the execution result of the program in the game control area can be completely separated from the process inside and outside the game control area without being updated in the process outside the game control area.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. FIG. In the memory arrangement shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the memory arrangement described above in FIG.
2 is also provided with a stack area.

The ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debugging (inspection function) code 13133, debugging (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation/display code 13135, and base calculation/display data 13136. Contains storage space. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 , and a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for calculating base values, such as base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136 .

Between the end address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, there is a free space (unused space) of 16 bytes or more, and when displayed in dump list format In addition, the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the leading address of the base calculation/display code 13135 . If the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format, which is desirable, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the empty area should be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value different from or less frequently set to the value set in the game control area and debug area. Also, the value stored in the empty area may be an instruction that the CPU does nothing, such as a No Operation code. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient if the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the debug area (code for debugging (inspection function), data for debugging (inspection function)), which is processing that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game, ) and the base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, so that defects (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 can be prevented from affecting the game control. Avoiding the danger of impact.

The debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game. A code 13133 for outputting an inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. The base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Also, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311 . In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. is configured to be executable, and is configured not to be able to write to this area. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area accessible only from the game control code 13131 . The process based on the debugging (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

Also, the base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 . The base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as shown. Thus, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the inspection of the base calculation/display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. It can be performed separately, and the labor for inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and reading and writing from the game control area 13126 are possible. In addition, the game control area 13126 cannot write data from the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation · The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126 .

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 . The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area where the data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used to temporarily save data stored in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 . Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111 . Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The base calculation area 13128 may include a main area for storing base calculation results, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set each time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, or set when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power failure process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if the power failure flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Incidentally, if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether or not the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control side power-off process, the values in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation/display process, the values in the main area may be copied to the backup area when the base calculation/display process ends. When at least part of the main area is updated, the entire main area or only the updated value area may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

[11. Recording game history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game histories will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines an effect suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from among a plurality of prepared effects, and displays the determined effect on the main liquid crystal display. Display on device 1600 . At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific effect (for example, two types of specific effects out of three types of super reach) among the prepared effects, the switching of the game state is the starting point. The number of times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, in what rotation the effect appeared) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 along with the progress of the game. to display.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears on the 34th rotation at 10:25, the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and on the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variation display game was a loss, and super reach 2 appeared on the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was a hit. is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot on the 15th spin and the jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed with a data display provided in the hall, but the specific performance that appears before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is good or bad based on the extent to which a specific effect appears (for example, if Super Ready-to-Win 2 appears within 50 spins after the end of the big win, it is considered that the big win will be won in a short time). In order to meet the player's expectations, the degree of appearance of the effect is visually displayed. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is confirming the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display shows the degree of appearance of all of the prepared effects, the player can check the degree of appearance of the effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game machine, and there is a possibility that the operation of the game machine will decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific ready-to-win effect (a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win) out of the ready-to-win effects. Also, the history of appearance for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates information on the number of times of variation and the effect that has appeared based on the received variation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed instead of all the effects that have appeared. Processing should be performed.

Also, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 to notify the staff of the hall. 115(A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or a detailed error screen shown in FIG. , output an alarm sound, and output an error signal shown in FIG. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118 and 119. FIG. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400 . Specifically, if the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, the state display LED included in the function display unit 1400 displays "0", and the LED in the right of the door lights up. Lights blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of a connector), a serious failure requiring part replacement, or fraudulent activity.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error occurrence, recover from the error, and operate. Investigating the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stoppage of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hole can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved early, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses the hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 according to the signal output from the external terminal board 784 . However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use "the number of winnings in the general winnings", "the number of winnings in the big winnings", "the number of passing through the gate", "normal symbol fluctuation Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it can be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem. business, and eventually the hall may face financial difficulties.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning a general winning slot", "winning a big winning slot", "passing through a gate", and "fluctuation of normal symbols" occur frequently, if all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze this, increasing the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 so that the stored data can be referred to later. This makes it possible to check the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, since the time of occurrence of events (number of winnings in general winnings, number of winnings in big winnings, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the course of the error occurrence is recorded, how long It is possible to know how many events have occurred in For example, an abnormality such as the number of prizes won in a general prize gate being 50 per minute can be detected.

If the date and time of occurrence are recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of the error will increase, and it will take time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined time period (for example, one minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in a general prize-winning slot in any game state, it is preferable to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined period of time from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in the large winning openings within the predetermined period of time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit according to the present embodiment. 120 is obtained by adding a game history recording process (step S1023) to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310 when the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as date and time of event occurrence in a format as shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power in consideration of retaining the memory contents even when the power is turned off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the game control process (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the steady process of the peripheral control part, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped on the way and part of the performance is not executed. That is, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed by the main control board 1310 does not change, and the benefits given to the player also change. Therefore, the game history is recorded with priority over the performance. In addition, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machine models.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit. When the data amount of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history. processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time can be reduced.

Also, when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and at the same time, using the spare processing time, new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple times of peripheral control unit steady processing due to lack of processing time) Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in a number of peripheral control unit steady processes because it is not necessary to be executed each time may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the types of commands recorded as game history among the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, that is, the events recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the commands and the purpose of recording as game history are as follows.

For example, when the starting gate 1 winning command and the starting gate 2 winning command are detected, respectively, when the winning of the game ball to the starting gate 2002 and the starting gate 2004 is detected, the commands are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each starting hole. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Also, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the RAM clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation are 4 states: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/non-time saving, high probability/non-time saving. You can count the number of changes that occur. Here, the low probability means a state in which the probability that a big win is derived in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability means a jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol variation display game. is a state in which the probability of being derived is higher than usual. Time saving, the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is open (or expanded) state is higher than non-time saving, or the time from the start of the normal pattern to the determination It is a state in which the frequency that the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state, such as shortening, is higher than in a non-time-saving state. Along with this, the probability of selecting an effect in which the duration of one special symbol variation display game is short increases.

A large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and a large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006 respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

For the big winning gate 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the big winning winning gate 2 winning command (regular winning or less), only the number of game balls less than the regulated number won by the end of the round at the big winning gate 2005 and the big winning gate 2006, respectively. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big winning hole (for example, from 1 second before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 Winning status in one round to each big winning opening can be acquired. The big winning mouth 1 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) and the big winning winning mouth 2 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) are the big winning mouth 2005 and the big winning mouth 2006 respectively. is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the closing of each big winning hole (for example, from 1 second before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winning in one round to each big winning slot. It should be noted that this command is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each of the big prize openings 2005 and 2006, when a specified number of prize balls (for example, 10) determined in one round is detected and the big prize openings are opened. This is because there is a possibility that undetected game balls exist in the big winning opening when the opening is closed, and the state of winning can be accurately grasped even in such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or when the role product continuous operation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot state ends, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

In the small hit OP command, the opening of the big winning opening is relatively short (for example, the opening time of one time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple times is less than 1.8 seconds). A command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small win), and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the normal symbol stop symbol and can count the normal symbol variation number. The normal figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the lottery for special symbols or normal symbols is not performed even after winning the starting gate or passing the gate (overflow or no memory, etc.), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the starting gate 1 winning. Send the time command, start gate 2 winning time command and normal figure gate passing command. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering the starting hole and the number of balls passing through the gate.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

The general winning port 1 winning command, the general winning port 2 winning command, and the general winning port 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins to each general winning port 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001 . It should be noted that the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning slots 2001, so four types of general winning slot winning commands from the general winning slot 1 winning command to the general winning slot 4 winning command are provided. Commands are defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, event, and event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 received the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time. Then, the peripheral controller 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310 . In the illustrated game history, the date and time of event occurrence are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the events that have occurred in relation to the commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and from the content of the command, the RAM was cleared, and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. That is, the pachinko hall opened at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), the player started playing, and won the general prize-winning slot 2001. I understand. In addition, the special design 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special design 1 design type command (type of stop design), special design fluctuation You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 variation start event of history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol variation display game I can see the result of Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is determined by the numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol variation. The result of the variable display game (losing, normal per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method of referring to the information (game history) recorded in the memory by the hole will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting information recorded in the memory from the peripheral controller 1511 is provided. When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the main control board 1310 , the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590 .

Also, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 , and when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590 . The history output interface 1590 may be composed of a history output terminal provided in the peripheral controller 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral controller 1511 . The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1 .

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range radio (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the output of the game history by the peripheral control unit 1511 is a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is being played after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the output of the game history (see FIG. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed in a command that is not defined in the history reference command may be used as the history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Also, a history reference command may be sent under the condition of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur) even with a command that is sent while playing a normal game. For example, it is the case that 50 prizes are won in the starting gate or the general prize gate in one minute. In addition, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order that cannot normally occur.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (where the player cannot see) to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

Peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 1310, and through frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) A liquid crystal display that performs drawing control of the exchanged peripheral control unit 1511, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs for controlling performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and V blank from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to be described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc. peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing schedule data, etc.), and various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state and special effect flags). management information, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ) and

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is interrupted for a long time (when power failure occurs for a long time). (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") supplies a backup power supply, so that the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. loses its contents as it becomes incapable of

Power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supplied from the power supply board 931 . In the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513, the game history is recorded, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the stored contents can be retained. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which constitutes an area for storing the game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown, the performance control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. be done.

When the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d forming an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As illustrated, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, the performance control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be composed of a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be retained even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.例文帳に追加

124A and 124B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any procedure different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. A history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command different from the normal power-on command.

Further, while the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when the power-on command is received continuously, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive data for transmitting to the motor drive board 4180 from the I/O port via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting drive signals to the electrical drive source provided on the door frame 3 is used for the frame decoration drive. Signals are transmitted from the amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 to drive the frame decoration. Transmit to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 220 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and via the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, according to commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, events occurring during the game are recorded as the game history. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall closes) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. In addition, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM with backup power input), the game history can be confirmed even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Also, for example, when winning the start gate 1, (1) the fact that the start gate 1 was won, (2) the time when the start gate 1 was won, (3) the event that occurred before the start gate 1 was won As shown in FIG. 116, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 . In this case, the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that (1) the starter has won) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when the starter wins. This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when investigating the This is because outputting all of the internally stored information from the external terminal board 784 at the time of winning a prize at the starting hole increases the output amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1, which may become a burden on the pachinko hall. is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and part of the information recorded inside is transmitted through the external terminal board 784 to the pachinko machine. 1, and in a special case, the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modified examples described below change a part of the above-described embodiment and constitute a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, for a predetermined command, the event (type of command) and the event occurrence date and time are recorded. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in Modification 1 (Compact Proposal 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in that state are recorded.

125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of modification 1. FIG.

In the game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command that triggers a state change. There is also The column of information that can be counted and the column of state change that can be obtained are provided for convenience of explanation. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which a counting attribute is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered command issuance as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, as a result of command analysis, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory, and generates a record for counting the number of events. Add

For example, the power-on command, the state command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands issued by state changes, respectively, power-on, special symbol fluctuation display start, It can be grasped as switching between the start of the jackpot state, the end of the jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using the count command, the number of events that triggered the issuance of the count command is counted. Specifically, the number of winning balls to each starting port can be counted in the start port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of variations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large winning mouth 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (regular winning or less) can count the number of rounds ended with the number of winnings equal to or less than the defined winning number. The large winning mouth 1 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) can count the number of rounds ended in excess of the prescribed number of winnings (that is, over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal design stop command can normally count the number of fluctuations in the design. Ordinary figure gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning hole.

126 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1. FIG.

The game history of the modified example 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. and the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the initialization time of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The state in which the counting event is recorded separately is assumed to be 5 states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, jackpot state. A state may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as counting events, the number of starting gate 1 wins, the number of starting gate 2 winnings, the number of special symbol 1 variations, the number of special symbol 2 variations, the number of general winnings 1 winning, the number of general winnings 2 winning, The number of winnings in general winning opening 3, the number of winning in large winning opening 1, the number of winning in large winning opening 2, the number of gate passages, and the number of normal pattern variations are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and does not have a large cumulative number (for example, the number of general winnings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, 1-byte data and 2-byte data should be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1-byte data and 2-byte data.

Also, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, an initial value of 0 may be stored in the new record created while the count event is being counted, even though no data is stored in the new record. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of counting events in the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read out from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is changed. The numerical value is added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , will be initialized by the normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low probability / non-time saving state, the game history information that 50 winning numbers to the starting port 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification In 1, after the game state changes, it is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM clear operation is performed while the probability is low and the time is not shortened, the 50 winning prizes are initialized to 0.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Also, even when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, the game history is continuously recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and the cumulative number of counting events does not have to be stored from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (accumulated number of counting events) in the oldest state may be erased and the accumulated number of counting events in the previous state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 151
1 can be reduced. Also, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Also, when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 .

As described above, in Modification 1, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1 is characterized by internally recording more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 .

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state in which no new record is created in the game history storage area (during the same game state), it may be difficult to detect fraud. As described above, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the hole can check the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. As long as the game state does not change, information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so even if information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, the first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the most recent state is recorded and the second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded. An error may be reported when the result of the comparison with .

For example, in a so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1 that shoots a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability/time-saving state or a jackpot game state, transition from a high probability/time-saving state to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, when the state is changed to a high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state is switched, the possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a is not extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high-probability/time-saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be reported. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls entering the general winning opening between states is set to 1, and an error is reported when there is a difference of 2 or more. This is because when the shooting handle is released, the shooting force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

A security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 116 instead of the error notification. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects an error by predicting the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is a high probability / time saving state, so it will hit right), so that an inexperienced player can There is a possibility that an error will be detected when you hit unexpectedly. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may output only a security signal from the external terminal board 784 without announcing the error, and may not notify the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and troubles with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is counted. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in Modification 2 (Compact Proposal 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In modification 2, the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in modification 1 is used to record the game history.

127 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of the history of state events and the total number of count events for each state. The state event history includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. be. The counting events (and the commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 include the number of start 1 wins (command when start 1 wins), the number of start 2 wins (command when start 2 wins), special Design 1 variation number (special design 1 design type command), special design 2 variation number (special design 2 design type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), general winning mouth 3 winning number (general winning mouth 3 winning command), big winning mouth 1 winning number (big winning mouth 1 winning command), big winning mouth 2 winning number (big winning mouth 2 winning command ), gate passing number (general figure gate passing command), normal design fluctuation number (normal design stop command).

Note that the number of count events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the count events are separately recorded may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the nonvolatile memory, and the above-described counting events are generated in correspondence with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. For this reason, the count results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power failure, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in Modification 2, changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state are recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the .

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the modification 2 described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state. Therefore, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In modification 3, the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in modification 1 is used to record the game history.

In Modification 3, the same events as those recorded in Modification 1 are recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

128 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the accumulated time is included is that the hole can estimate the number of occurrences of the event (eg, the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) from the accumulated time. The states in which counting events are recorded separately are 5 states: low probability/non-time-saving state, low probability/time-saving state, high probability/non-time-saving state, high probability/time-saving state, and jackpot state. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and the commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of start 1 wins (command when start 1 wins), the number of start 2 wins (command when start 2 wins), special Design 1 variation number (special design 1 design type command), special design 2 variation number (special design 2 design type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), general winning mouth 3 winning number (general winning mouth 3 winning command), big winning mouth 1 winning number (big winning mouth 1 winning command), big winning mouth 2 winning number (big winning mouth 2 winning command ), gate passing number (general figure gate passing command), normal design fluctuation number (normal design stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of counting events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. For this reason, the count results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power failure, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in Modification 2, changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state are recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the .

As described above, in modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is temporarily recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In a normal RAM clear operation, information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here I will briefly touch on the hall business. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening at 10:00 and closing at 23:00. For this reason, it is sometimes difficult for staff to monitor whether players are playing illegal games during hours when there are many players, such as hours just after the store opens or in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high-probability/short-time state just before closing time, the high-probability/short-time state pachinko machine is initialized for the next day's business, and the low-probability/ It may be in a non-working time state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it is possible to know whether or not the most recent game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering that some pachinko machines do not require the most recent game history, it is possible to provide an efficient gaming machine by enabling the store clerk to select whether or not to keep the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by a RAM clear operation, the game history stored in the work area regarding the event that occurred after the latest event is erased, and the game history is stored regarding the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, there are information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. In this way, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only needs to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine. The store clerk should just perform the ram clear operation. The RAM clear operation does not erase all game histories, but only erases the game histories stored in the work area related to events that occurred after the most recent event. This is because the store clerk has not seen the events that have occurred by then (since there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only is the information about the winning of the starting gate, but also the winning of the general winning gate, which is not related to the lottery, is temporarily recorded in the work area. A pattern that starts to fluctuate by winning a prize in a start slot, and even if the pattern that indicates the lottery result of winning or losing with the stop mode of this pattern) does not fluctuate, the game is played while the game ball is launched in the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the lottery for win or loss is triggered, but a process that may be executed at all times while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Moreover, if it is a low-probability and non-time-saving state, it shoots a game ball so that a game ball may win a prize to the start opening 2002 like so-called left-handed hitting and choro-hitting. In such a case, it should be moderately awarded to the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 . However, if there is no winning (or extremely few) to the general winning opening 2001, but many game balls have won the starting opening 2002, conversely there is no winning (or extremely few) to the starting opening 2002 ), but if many game balls have won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as objects to be monitored, and the number of winning to the first winning hole is a predetermined ratio of the number of winning to the second winning hole. An error may be signaled when the

Also, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 instead of the error notification. The detection method described above may detect an error when an inexperienced player makes an unexpected stroke. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may output only a security signal from the external terminal board 784 without announcing the error, and may not notify the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and troubles with the player can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized by collecting information accumulated in a plurality of games as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded. there is

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, as game performance, a setting function for changing, for example, the operating ratio of the condition device.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section with the door open, viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 with the door closed, viewed from the back side, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 , and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974 .

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting key 971 for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting a changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, operation signals of the setting key 971 , the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control section 952 . Also, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952 . The determined settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 . Note that the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970, as will be described later.

The setting key 971 is used to change to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position to maintain the short-circuit or open state of the contact. It is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers the Note that the setting key 971 may not be provided, and another switch may also be used. In this case, by operating (long pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A long press may end the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Also, the setting change mode may be started/finished by operating the RAM clear switch 954 . For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). In other words, when the setting change switch 972 is pushed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the set value=6 and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value becomes 1. The setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972 . It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 steps, and may be set in fewer steps (for example, 2 steps) or in more steps (for example, 8 steps).

Also, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972 . In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages, and the key can be inserted and removed at the neutral position (normal position). This is an operation for selecting a value (turning it to the right functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

In addition, the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot, the ratio of the time saving (ST) after the jackpot, the number of times of saving time, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of the normal drawing, the general winning mouth, the starting mouth and the big winning mouth Various game-related parameters, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that a player can win.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1 . The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 are preferably configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured by a push button switch, and the setting determination switch 973 may be configured by a momentary toggle switch.

Alternatively, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973 . Further, the set value selected with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger may be determined. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, operation of the ball lending button , the operation of the return button, the winning detection of the game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004, etc., may determine the selected setting. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used in the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set

Furthermore, the setting change operation may be enabled only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. FIG. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch By operating (long pressing) 954 for a predetermined time or longer, the set value can be determined. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . It should be noted that the setting display 974 may be configured by LEDs for the number of values that can be set instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, dots may be turned off when displaying error types, and lit when displaying set values. Alternatively, the error type display may be lit (not blinking), and the setting value may be blinking.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 , but may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930 . By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when changing the settings are arranged close to each other, thereby improving the operability of the setting change. can be improved.

Also, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310 .

As another form, the setting board 970 may not be an independent board, but may be part of the payout control board 951 , the power supply board, or the main control board 1310 . That is, either the payout control board 951, the power supply board or the main control board 1310 may be equipped with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973 and the setting display 974.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 , at least part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 . When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, making it difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, prevents the key from being inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). act as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting keys 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40 . In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap, setting is made during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). By making it difficult to operate the substrate 970, it is possible to prevent a player from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (means for making setting change difficult) while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but other members may be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 . Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the body frame 4 may be provided, and when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap. .

The setting change making member configured to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970 . In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Also, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover for preventing careless operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (eg, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, the outer frame 2 is provided with a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 . The second cover body may be provided on the body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started by careless operation, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of an illegal player changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ).

The setting board 970 may be arranged near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing the setting and the power switch 932 are arranged near each other. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability when starting the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided for clearing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during a game and can be operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) are provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent actions to change the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during the game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the player's machine selection, so it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should also face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as visibility making means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section) difficult to see.

FIG. 132B is a top view of the setting board 970 with the body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 . In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 , the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 .

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. It is difficult to confirm the current setting values of pachinko machines.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970. As shown in FIG.

In this modified example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting determination switch 973, and a setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

For this reason, the setting board 970 of this modified example is installed not on the side surface side of the body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface of the setting board 970 (that is, the side surface of the setting board 970) with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2 is
(keyhole) faces the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971. Cannot insert.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 can be operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. A fraudulent act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modified example, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310 .

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine mounted with a game board shown; FIG.

A setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971 , a setting change switch 972 , a setting determination switch 973 and a setting display 974 . The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132(A) or the one shown in FIG. 133(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, controls the display of the settings indicator 974 .

The setting board 970 and the functions and configurations of the components on the setting board are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base indicator 1317 composed of a 7-segment LED. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used together, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317 . The base display 1317 normally switches between the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight section) at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, during the setting change mode, the selected (to be set next) setting value is displayed, and during setting confirmation (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, the base value may be displayed using four digits, but the setting value may be displayed using only one predetermined digit (for example, the rightmost digit) and displaying "-". Digits that are not used to display the set value may display other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used to display the base value. Also, when displaying the setting value, characters that are not used for displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the setting value is displayed in six stages of alphabetical characters A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and the determined setting value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be indicated by lighting. Also, in the base display, the upper two digits represent the type of display data, and numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the most significant digit may be used to display the setting value. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is preferentially displayed during the setting change mode and setting confirmation, so the base value is displayed even though the base value is being calculated. not. After that, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set values are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base values.

Also, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content to the base display 1317 is executed. The process of outputting is executed by base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, processing for outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided within the game control area. By sharing the processing, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display contents to the base display 1317 is for base calculation/display outside the game control area. When executed with code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and security can be improved.

In addition, the process of setting change and setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is shared with the base display 1317 is included in the scope of the invention described herein. In this way, by displaying a plurality of displays provided in the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused during the setting change mode and setting value confirmation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and setting value misunderstanding when changing settings.

Also, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed. By not displaying a plurality of displays in the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode and setting value confirmation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and setting value misrecognition at the time of setting change.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may be equipped with a setting key 971 , a setting change switch 972 , a setting confirmation switch 973 and a setting display 974 .

The configuration board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 along with the main control board 1310 . When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes and cutouts for operating the setting keys 971, setting change switches 972, and setting confirmation switches 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 , the structure of the main control board box 1320 , that is, the opening/closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970 . Specifically, when the key 975 is vertically inserted into the board from the front side of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 on the front side and the back side of the setting board 970 or the front side box body ( (or cover) and the box on the back side may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is configured so that the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box of the setting board 970 extend in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends. It is preferable to have a structure in which they are separated by sliding in (the direction in which the key 975 is inserted).

In this modification, operation signals of setting keys 971 , setting change switches 972 and setting confirmation switches 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311 . Also, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311 .

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (the left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. When the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 , at least part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 . When the body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Switch operation is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting keys 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40 . In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap, setting is made during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). A fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (means for making setting change difficult) while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but other members may be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 . Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the body frame 4 may be provided, and when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ).

136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 has the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 initialized. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided for clearing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during a game and can be operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) are provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent actions to change the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during the game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the player's machine selection, so it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should also face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as visibility making means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section) difficult to see.

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the top view of the setting board 970 with the body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132(B) and 133(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 .

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that the setting change processing is performed in S28). The same steps as in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the data of the set value and the game state (for example, the probability variable state, the time saving state, the special design and the normal design reservation storage, the prize ball information) is left, and other data are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. area other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There is a power failure flag failure (step S20), a RAM failure (step S22) in which the RAM checksum does not match, and a base calculation workpiece failure (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the set value and the game Leave the data of (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls), clear other data, and do not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) . When operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area) is cleared, for base calculation Area 13128 (including base calculation work area and base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are stored for each type of data (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), base calculation Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because, if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the set values need to be reset for each RAM clear operation, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

Either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be employed for the processing after step S28 as required. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame release switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control section 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as setting change permission state generation means. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 of touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid If there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance in the cash sand, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode. Moreover, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error). These conditions may be determined after the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an illegal player is about to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

(2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310 .

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, it executes RAM clear processing before setting change. RAM clear processing before this setting change, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area), game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, special design and normal design pending storage , information about prize balls) are left, other data are cleared, and the area for base calculation 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value is set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode is to perform the initial operation of the character or to perform a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial action of the role object. For example, in the case of displaying the setting change procedure or state on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial action of the character is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden. This is because it interferes with the change work.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511 . For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the firing permission signal, stops firing the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as firing disabling means, thereby notifying the setting change mode. good too. When stopping the shooting of game balls during the setting change mode, the shooting of game balls during the shooting stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during this period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is a state in which no setting has been made, and the setting change mode cannot be ended with the setting value = 0, and the game (game ball firing, floating display games, etc.) does not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control section 952 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Although the procedure (1) described above also determines whether the body frame 4 is open, it may be determined at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as setting change allowable state generation means for determining whether the setting change conditions are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Furthermore, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value, and confirms the setting value. is displayed on the setting display 974 . The setting value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the setting value, or may blink the fixed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310 . By this setting change end command, the main control MPU 1311 is notified of the determined set values.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952 , it transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the setting is being changed. Along with this, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

The notification (including game stop and firing stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered merely to be a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification should be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is taken from the viewpoint of discovery of fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting change mode is terminated. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined period of time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the shooting of game balls is stopped during a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, shooting of game balls during the shooting suspension period is treated as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, among game control area 13126 (including work area for game and stack area for game), set value and game state Reservation storage, information about prize balls) data is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clear processing after setting change, the set values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clear processing before setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

Thus, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the processing described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, by transmitting a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency for a predetermined number of times), or by transmitting a power supply voltage. However, an intermediate potential signal that is not the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is sent from the payout control unit 952 by a signal that cannot be caused by a short-circuit of the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310 .

Next, the setting display processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control section 952 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

(2) When the payout control unit 952 determines that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, it transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310. FIG.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a set value request command from the payout control unit 952, it reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits a set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays on the setting display 974 the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 .

In the above description, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974. The set value may be displayed on the setting indicator 974 .

Next, setting change processing by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame release switch. A detection signal of the body frame open switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The payout control board 951 may transmit a body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch. Also, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 of touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid If there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance in the cash sand, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode. Moreover, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an illegal player is about to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. RAM clear processing before this setting change, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area), game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, special design and normal design pending storage , information about prize balls) are left, other data are cleared, and the area for base calculation 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value is set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode is to perform the initial operation of the character or to perform a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial action of the role object. For example, in the case of displaying the setting change procedure or state on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial action of the character is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden. This is because it interferes with the change work.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511 . For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the firing permission signal, stops firing the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as firing disabling means, thereby notifying the setting change mode. good too. When stopping the shooting of game balls during the setting change mode, the shooting of game balls during the shooting stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during this period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is a state in which no setting has been made, and the setting change mode cannot be ended with the setting value = 0, and the game (game ball firing, floating display games, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974 each time the player operates the setting change switch 972 .

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Although the procedure (1) described above also determines whether the body frame 4 is open, it may be determined at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met before the setting change is confirmed (especially whether the main body frame opening switch detection signal is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and notifies that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974 . The setting value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the setting value, or may blink the fixed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the setting is being changed. Along with this, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

The notification (including game stop and firing stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered merely to be a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification should be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is taken from the viewpoint of discovery of fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting change mode is terminated. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined period of time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the shooting of game balls is stopped during a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, shooting of game balls during the shooting suspension period is treated as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, among game control area 13126 (including work area for game and stack area for game), set value and game state Reservation storage, information about prize balls) data is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clear processing after setting change, the set values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clear processing before setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a slave board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrated with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display processing in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 , it reads the setting values stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays them on the setting display 974 .

138(A) and 139(A), when the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode is invalidated and the setting change mode is temporarily stopped. Then, by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning on the power again, the stopped setting change mode is resumed. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (set value=0 when no set value is selected).

It is preferable to record a history of changes in set values for a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting was confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 . When the history of setting values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Furthermore, a history of changes in recorded set values can be output. For example, a history of changes in recorded setting values may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

The interval for measuring the base value may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out-balls in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the game machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate the base value that does not mix different game performance, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Also, when the setting value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditional device, it is possible to design the base value not to change greatly by changing the set value. This is because, in such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Also, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. Considering the method of operation and the layout of the operation means, the possibility of erroneously operating the setting key 971 is lower than the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. Therefore, the setting change mode is activated. is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting change mode, since the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode even if the user wishes to clear the RAM. .

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because it is assumed that the operator wants at least a RAM clear when both are being operated. Also, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode and clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of the special symbols may be erased. The setting value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, and the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and make a new lottery.

On the other hand, the lottery for special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball enters the starting hole, but the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game. It suffices to determine the reserved and stored random value. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 . That is, in the RAM clearing process in the setting change mode, the backed-up game control area 13126 other than the set values is erased (game state data is also erased), and the set values and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day. This is because there is no need to maintain without

[12-2. Effect in pachinko machine with setting function]
[12-2-1. Special pattern and special electric accessories control process]
Details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process procedure. The special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as starting ports. Also, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big prize opening. Moreover, the first special design and the second special design are generically called simply a special design.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port, that is, the start winning prize (satisfaction of the starting condition), the big hit for each starting memory information (starting information) in which the starting condition is satisfied. A determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches a big hit determination value preliminarily stored in a main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a big win game state based on the lottery result. A game state is shifted to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described along the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric role product control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big winning hole (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a big winning hole winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1311, when the game ball has won the starting hole (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the start-up win-time process, a start-up win-win command to be transmitted when a game ball newly wins in the start-up win is set, a random number for judging a big hit is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special pattern is set. It also executes processing and the like for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes corresponding processing based on the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step S124). The game progress state variables are stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area. End the process. Since the values of the game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, they are backed up in the main control side power failure process.

In the processing of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as branch processing, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation in-process (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), Special symbol deviation stop processing (step S1
36), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before large winning opening opening (step S140), large winning opening opening processing (step S142), large winning opening closing process (step S144) or large winning opening opening End interval processing (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), when the game ball B enters the starting hole, the special symbol display device starts to display the variation of the special symbol.

In the special symbol fluctuation process (step S132), a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol and the like are performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the fixed and stopped special symbol generates a big win game state based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole.

In the special symbol deviation stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and notifying that effect is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big win game state and notifying that a big win operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big winning operation for making it easier for a game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), by closing the big winning opening from the open state, a process related to the big winning operation to make it difficult for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is over, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol variation waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not performed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparations are made to start the special symbol variation display.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation pending balls is not zero. In addition, the number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. When the variation of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbols is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a pending ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the random number for judging the big hit acquired at the time of winning the starting game.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command for transmission to peripheral control board 1510 . Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the variation type classification value is acquired from the variation type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type classification value to the command value set in step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command thus created is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern based on the number of special symbol operation pending balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is retrieved from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation type determination processing for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbols (step S548). The variation type classification value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variable time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of times of pseudo consecutive. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variable time added value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the standard variable time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variable time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern selection determination processing. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table includes hit (hit variation selection information state table), loss (loss variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are stored in table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When a big win is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big win flag and a big win symbol type are obtained (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation information number search processing based on the jackpot flag and jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big win or a small win (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372).

The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the lost variation selection information retention table based on the number of retained balls when the reach is not generated in the variation display (step S372 result is "no") (step S376).

On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag when the reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes") (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation information number search processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the processing of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Furthermore, based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table, variation information number search processing is executed (step S394). Select a variation pattern based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396)
, the process ends.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, based on the variation pattern random number 1, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ system reach) is selected. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed in a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2 . It should be noted that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, and a method of drawing lots in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Explanation of production in pachinko machine with setting function]
The effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described below. Specifically, a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the current settings will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls to be paid out with respect to the number of special lotteries. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the non-variable state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270 , setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest possible settings, the player's willingness to play is enhanced by installing the setting suggesting effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern directly with one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state (whether it is a time-saving state (state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state), and the result of the special lottery (won the jackpot It selects a variation pattern table according to whether it is positive or negative). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number for the variation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out, it is further determined whether or not reach occurs, the random number for the variation pattern is obtained, and the obtained random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, Based on, the variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table.

FIG. 144(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is lost. FIG. 144(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big win.

The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information specifying the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information specifying the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution for selecting the corresponding variation pattern for each setting. In addition, the random number column for determining the variation pattern of the variation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is out (that is, the variation pattern table in FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) is when reach occurs. And for each of reach non-occurrence time, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting Suggestion Effect Executed After Temporary Display of Special Lottery Result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 as well.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the lost variation pattern 20, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is lost. A confirmation display indicating that is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . On the other hand, in the fluctuations of the lost fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after displaying a temporary display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost after the SP reach 1 is executed, A setting suggesting effect is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is lost is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.例文帳に追加

In this way, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, after the provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is performed, the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that even if the provisional display is performed The player can expect the generation of the setting suggesting effect after that and maintain the sense of anticipation. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is generated in the loss fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, the disappointment of the player due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In addition, in the variation of the lost variation pattern 24, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after SP reach 1 is executed, a provisional display indicating that the result is likely to be lost is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although the guess performance suggesting the execution is executed, the setting suggestion performance itself is not performed, and a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is lost is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.例文帳に追加

The SP reach is a ready-to-win effect that is highly selected when the special lottery result is a big hit and is less likely to be selected when the special lottery result is a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit of variation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Below, the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each production, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and/or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc. are executed at the same time. may

In the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all decorative patterns change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. - 特許庁Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into a normal reach effect. In the normal ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . Specifically, for example, among three decorative patterns (for example, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern), the left pattern and the right pattern stop at the same pattern, and the middle pattern is fluctuating.

Subsequently, in the outlier fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into SP reach 1, and S
The first half production of P reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half production of the SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes a production in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. During the SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed smaller and closer to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 than during the pre-reach performance and the normal reach performance, for example.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into the second half performance of SP reach 1. In the second half production of the SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called resurrection production is executed, for example, at the start of the second half production, the main character's voice such as "still more!" On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game is played again between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half effect of SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes the effect that the main character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a provisional display indicating that the special lottery results are out. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbols as the stopped symbols in the reach state, and the middle symbol is A pattern different from the same pattern) is displayed in such a manner that it sways in a small width.

Subsequently, in the loss variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss without any other effect. In the loss fluctuation pattern 24, the setting suggestion false effect is executed after the provisional display, and then the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the final display, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as during the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the set-suggestion fake effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, an effect is executed in which one main character finds two enemy characters on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and chases the enemy characters but cannot catch them. Like the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 144(A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns for which the setting-suggestion fake effect is executed is uniform or approximately uniform in all settings. This is because, if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion fake effect suggests the setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24 in the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion fake effect will occur frequently when the SP reach 1 develops, and there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect will be reduced.

In the setting-suggestion effects in the outlier variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character finds two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then three people play rock-paper-scissors. A production is executed.

In the setting-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 25, a effect is executed in which the three players play rock-paper-scissors game and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is determined to be sorted only in the low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is the effect that the low setting is confirmed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 etc. in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If it occurs, the player may stop the game early, so the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other set fixed effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern 25 itself may not exist.

In the set-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 26, an effect is executed in which all three players pull out scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 is determined to be sorted only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 is a effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the set-suggestion effect in the loss variation pattern 27, an effect is executed in which all three players get a par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in the even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 27 is the effect that the even setting is confirmed.

In the set-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 28, an effect is executed in which the three players put out different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 28 is the effect that the odd setting is confirmed.

In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player's interest in the effect can be attracted by installing the odd number setting confirmed effect or the even number set confirmed effect as described above. .

Specifically, for example, in order of setting 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), setting 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, In order of 2, the ratio of probability variable jackpots among jackpot winnings is high (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and probability variation rate in each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls put out to the winning number of game balls to the game ball is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a lower probability variable ratio, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one consecutive game from the beginning tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to the even number setting, the odd number setting has a low jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a high probability variation ratio, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first win tends to be large, but the first win The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single consecutive residence tends to be large. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball payout tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball payout tendency. The player's interest in the performance increases. Also, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting may have a feature such as a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a larger jackpot with a smaller number of rounds being more likely to be selected.

In the outlier variation patterns 25 to 29 described above, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (the results of the rock-paper-scissors game among three players are different). Incidentally, it is desirable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game effect be used only in the lost variation patterns 25-29. As a result, when the three-person rock-paper-scissors game performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggesting performance has started, and the feeling of exhilaration is heightened.

It should be noted that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect in which the high setting is confirmed is executed, but it may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if there is a distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the production in the outlier fluctuation pattern 25 is not a production that confirms the high setting, but a production that suggests that the possibility of high setting is high.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect that the high setting is confirmed is performed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting as described above is performed may be determined. What has been described above is the same for the low setting confirmation effect, the odd setting confirmation effect, the even setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (variation pattern table at normal time and jackpot winning), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning variation pattern other than 34 in which the highest setting is fixed The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of variation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is high compared to the case where the special lottery result is a loss. As a result, the setting suggestion performance becomes a performance mainly executed when the special lottery result is a win, and the player can get a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is a win.

[12-5. Setting Suggestion Production Using Shortened Variation]
The deviation fluctuation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

For outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, shortening variation is performed. A shortened variation is, for example, a variation with a shorter variation time compared to other variation patterns, and after starting variation of decorative patterns on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all decorations are completed without developing into a ready-to-win state. It is a variation in which the symbol stops. In the normal variation, the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stop in the order of, for example, left, right, and middle symbols.

Subsequently, in loss fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be a loss is performed, final display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is a loss. Descriptions of temporary display and final display are omitted because they are the same as those described above.

The outlier variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation times of all other variation patterns such as the outlier variation patterns 1 and 2 for which shortening variation is performed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is determined to be sorted only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the deviating fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which shortening fluctuation is executed and suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which shortening fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern is less than 10% of the minimum allocation of ). Moreover, in each variation pattern in which shortened variation is performed, it is desirable that the execution time of temporary display and final display be the same, and that only the time of shortened variation is different. Also, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the outlier variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortened variation is executed is recognizable by the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortened variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time such as the often-distributed outlier variation patterns 1 and 2, but when the outlier variation pattern 30 is executed, the variation time does not match the assumed variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the production that the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation pattern including the shortened variation is selected only when there is no reach, so the player's expectations are reduced when the shortened variation is executed, and the interest in the shortened variation is reduced. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortened variation in this way, the player can have expectations for the shortened variation that is selected only when the reach is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Also, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are the same, only the shortening fluctuation time is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the highest setting fixed performance.

Note that the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is a fluctuation pattern in which the maximum setting is confirmed and the shortened fluctuation is executed. Patterns may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other deviating variation patterns for which shortening variation is performed.

[12-6. Setting Suggestion Effect Executed Before Temporary Display of Special Lottery Result]
The loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described below with reference to FIG. 147 as well. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the loss variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, a special movie 1 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be lost is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 ends, temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed.

Unlike the loss variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 start the setting suggesting effect before the provisional display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the variation starts). As a result, the player can get an exhilarating feeling waiting for the notification of the result of the jackpot lottery while the maximum setting is fixed. In addition, when the display time of the special movie 1 is particularly long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player can The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other player, and the hole can easily appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
The loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described below with reference to FIG. 148 as well. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 32 is determined to be sorted only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation fluctuation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, a special movie 2 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only with the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In the loss variation pattern 32, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be lost is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 ends, temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the big hit in the variation is decided. In other words, if the special lottery result is lost after the special movie 2 occurs, the high setting is confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment of the special lottery result being lost, and thus the high setting is achieved. A feeling of elation can be obtained by confirming

In addition, when the display time of the special movie 2 is particularly long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players. When the special lottery result is a loser, the hole can easily appeal to other players that the high setting is used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion production in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected in the game state time saving state will be described. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 149(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the loss variation pattern 3 and the smaller the allocation of the loss variation pattern 2 at the time of loss without reach. Also, the variation time of the error variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the error variation pattern 3 . For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a short time. There is a risk that the number of game balls to be paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hole.

However, as shown in the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more variation patterns with longer variation times are distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out by the big hit per unit time in each setting can be equalized. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviating variation pattern 3, which has a longer variation time, among the variation patterns including the shortening variation. Therefore, the deviating variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern that suggests a high setting. can be done.

Similarly, when the reach is not reached, the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 11 with a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the allocation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 with a short fluctuation time. Likewise, when the big win is won, the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the winning variation pattern 2 with the longer variation time and the smaller the allocation of the winning variation pattern 3 with the shorter variation time.

As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the big win, and the more game balls are shot until the big win is won. For example, the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of variation patterns with a long variation time, and the lower the selection rate of variation patterns with a short variation time. It is possible to equalize the number of shots of game balls per unit time in the setting.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated ones that are executed only during the setting suggestion effect. In addition, especially in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting and the maximum setting are confirmed, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output and a predetermined light emission effect, which are executed only in the setting suggestion effect, are executed.

It should be noted that it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the high setting or the highest setting is confirmed or executed with a high possibility is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. When the distribution of the variation pattern is high, the player loses expectations and ends up playing the game early if the high setting suggesting effect or the highest setting suggesting effect is not executed even though the player is playing for only a short playing time. This is because there is a risk of discontinuation.

In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which an effect suggesting that the low setting or the lowest setting is confirmed or executed with a high possibility is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. This is because, if the distribution of the variation pattern is high, the low setting suggesting performance and the minimum setting suggesting performance are frequently executed, so that the player loses his sense of anticipation and eventually stops playing the game at an early stage.

Also, the setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting group such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd setting, and even setting has been described, but the setting group in the setting suggesting effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect may be executed for any group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as medium settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings.

[12-9. Other form of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 , and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974 .

FIG. 150(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 150B, on the main control board 1310, a main control MPU 1311, a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. In addition, the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310 . In this case, main control board box 1320 is not provided with hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) are provided in the main control board box 1320 to trigger RAM clear. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by connecting the boards directly with a connector or by using an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Outputs of various switches 971 , 972 , and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to ports of the main control MPU 1311 .

Also, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 , the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 .

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set in the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads the authentication code set in the setting board 970 and checks it.
If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from starting a game. In other words, the game ball can be shot toward the game area 5a, but the prize ball is not paid out even if it enters the winning hole, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or may be set for each pachinko machine serial number. The method of setting the authentication code includes, for example, setting the authentication code with a DIP switch, jumper wire, jumper pin, pattern short circuit, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or setting the authentication code in a logic circuit (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)) may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Also, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. FIG. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to specific ports of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320 . By setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 150(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 related to prize balls won by the player, such as the probability of a big hit in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the hall business policy. On the other hand, there are halls where conventional pachinko machines without setting functions are sufficient and the setting functions are unnecessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers must design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a demand for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have the setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. to Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

Dummy board 979 does not have devices mounted on setting board 970 such as setting keys 971 and setting display 974, but may have patterns for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made up of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970 without being made up of a printed board.

Also, since the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is neither open nor grounded on the dummy board 979, and is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Also, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310 .

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 971A. A setting function is provided by providing a small door in the main control board box 1320 which can be moved to close the hole 971A so as to be operable from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and not operable from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be made common for a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

An authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in the dummy board 979 to be described later. Also, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310 and does not need to be set with an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With a setting change switch 972 and with a setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), the pachinko machine will start. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting determination switch 973 is operated.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972 and with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting determination switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the set value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) Without setting change switch 972 and without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. After selecting the set value to be set by operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the set value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

The mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a main control board box 1320 is provided with a small door 1321 .

FIG. 151(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. As described above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened once closed without breaking. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for manipulating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered with a small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided on the small door 1321. By inserting a key 975 into the key hole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 becomes operable.

As shown in FIG. 152(A), in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, and the bar 1323 is inserted into the receiving seat 1324. are engaged to fix the small door 1321 in the closed position. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated as shown in FIG. , the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing yet another mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the example shown in FIG. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (the setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600 , and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980 . On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the rear cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the rear cover 980 is exposed to the rear side. The setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the rear cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for manipulating the . The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 . On the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown). In addition, the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310 . In this case, the main control board box 13
20 is not provided with hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by connecting the boards directly with a connector or by using an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

[12-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that RAM clear processing is performed (steps S17 and S30) when the setting key 971 is operated. 21 and 101, the same steps as those of the initialization process described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has passed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after power-on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after power-on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is ON (step S17). If the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is a normal RAM clearing operation, so the process advances to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 . On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is operated, that is, if the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since it is necessary to operate two switches and to operate the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode.

In the setting change mode, first, the setting values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974 . Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. Therefore, the hall computer should be notified when the setting change mode is entered during business hours.

Whether the security signal is output for a predetermined period from the start of the setting change mode, or is output from the start to the end of the setting change mode, or is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. may be output. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further enhanced.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pushed once, the set value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change mode and fix the setting value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Also, the setting change mode may be ended with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), whether the checksum matches (step S22), whether the power failure flag is not set, and the check If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and game state (for example, variable probability state, Time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data are erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. It should be noted that the game state data may be erased without being left. In this case, the memory area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the memory area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and further detects a setting change operation.

In step S17, if the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) ) are left, and other data are erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Also, in step S18, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power failure flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. (step S30) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. The stored data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag There are a power failure flag failure (step S20) that is not set, a RAM failure (step S22) in which the RAM checksum does not match, and a base calculation workpiece failure (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the set value and the game Leave the data of (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls), clear other data, and do not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) . When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality and RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are stored for each type of data (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), base calculation Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because, if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the set values need to be reset for each RAM clear operation, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

Either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be employed for the processing after step S28 as required. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, and is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 155 and 156). may be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the setting value by careless operation during operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for setting confirmation is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for setting confirmation), and when the power is turned on, When the operation unit for confirming the setting is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312 to generate data for displaying on the setting display 974, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. do it. Also in this case, it is preferable to output the security signal along with the display of the setting value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode is completed (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 controls to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control section may be cleared together with this. Moreover, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 . Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. Thus, by changing the operation method, it is possible to clear a partial area of the main control RAM 1312 and execute a process in which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Also, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952. can occur. That is, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931, when changing the setting value, while operating the RAM clear switch 954 It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, instead of the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 It is determined whether or not it is operated, and whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is determined. If the payout control board 951 is provided with a RAM clear switch, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. Object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. In addition, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt process described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 ( 103) to calculate the base value (step S801, see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors control processing ( Step S88) is executed.

After that, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying the setting value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by the hall employee performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of the pachinko machine setting confirmation process of the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155) and executed.

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation, and the current settings can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected while the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 has some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraud). should not be displayed. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The setting value may be displayed at any time during operation of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Also, a set display condition may be provided to enable display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or CPU initial setting in step S28), and to display the set value until the timer expires.

Also, a setting display condition may be provided to enable the setting value to be displayed in a specific game state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided to enable the setting value to be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol fluctuation and during the jackpot. It should be noted that the display of the setting value may be disabled in game states other than those described above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during a game, and it is a sign of fraud. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a specified period of time from the start of setting value display, from the start of setting value display to the end of setting value display, or from the start of setting value display to a predetermined period after the end of setting value display. good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the setting value is displayed, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further enhanced.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied. good.

After that, the setting value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974 .

If the set display conditions are not met, the conditions are checked until the set display conditions are met. The confirmation process may end. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because of the special symbol variation display, when the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the set display condition is set with the termination of the special symbol variation display as an opportunity. and displays the set value. Also, if the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating confirmation of the setting condition.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set values can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set values can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a game state in which a large number of prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desired to confirm a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Security signal output accompanying setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of security signals output with setting change and setting confirmation.

As described above, a security signal is output during the setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time at which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Also, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157B, the security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time at which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Also, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed) instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) after the error is detected. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error while checking the settings, as shown in FIG. 157(E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected. That is, the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time after error detection). Even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal may not be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during security signal output, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting change mode, the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection do not overlap. That is, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs during the setting change mode, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs during setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Another example of the setting confirmation process will be described below. In the above description, an example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process has been mainly described. example.

Specifically, for example, when the setting key is on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. Details of the processing will be described below. Note that the timer interrupt processing executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt processing in FIG. 23 (that is, timer interrupt processing that does not include the setting confirmation processing in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. If the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated (step S18: No), it determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 shifts to setting confirmation processing in step S807, and then shifts to step S20. The setting confirmation processing in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is OFF (step S29: No), the process proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the processing of step S8061 (step S8062). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), it outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the set display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), it executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing of step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is off (step S8071). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), for example, after a predetermined time has passed, the determination of step S8071 is performed again. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), it hides the setting value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time in the special symbol, etc. are stored as they are. After that, when the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on), after the setting confirmation process is completed (setting is performed without turning off the power) After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation resumes. At this time, for example, the production that has been executed along with the special design variation (production using a display device, production using a lamp, sound production using a speaker, and production using a movable body, etc.) is the special design Nothing is done after the resumption of the fluctuation.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the completion of the setting confirmation process, the special symbol variation You may restart the production that was being executed with. For example, the production using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker, which has been interrupted, is resumed. In addition, regarding the production using the movable body, for example, after the special symbol variation is restarted or after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the power is turned on, it is determined to operate the movable body in the production pattern of the production. If so, move the movable body according to the effect pattern.

In other words, if the movable body is not in the initial position and has shifted to the setting confirmation state, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or the setting confirmation process is completed, and then based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation If the determined effects include an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). If the setting confirmation state is entered while the movable body is moving (moving), the action pattern for that movement (moving) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to its initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that allows it to operate even if it is empty.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the completion of the setting confirmation process, the special symbol variation Among the productions that were executed with the display device, the production using the lamp, and the sound production using the speaker are resumed, and after the special pattern variation is restarted or when the power is turned on, the movable body is returned to the initial position. It is not necessary to perform the effect using the return and the movable body.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is completed, the main liquid crystal display device The variation of the decorative pattern displayed in 1600 may be restarted (resume the production originally scheduled to be performed), or until the design is confirmed in the variation of the decorative pattern (or until the shake fluctuation just before the design is confirmed) ) The decorative pattern may be made transparent for high-speed variation, or the decorative pattern may not be displayed until the design is fixed (or until the shake fluctuation immediately before the design is fixed). Also, at the time of finalizing the pattern, for example, the combination of decorative patterns scheduled before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . Also, in this case, at the end of the special pattern fluctuation after the restart, a combination of predetermined decorative patterns, a combination of decorative patterns displayed at the time of initial power-on, or a special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal special pattern fluctuation A combination (for example, “xxx”, etc.) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 .

It should be noted that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special pattern variation, and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time. When the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on), the same initial operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, an operation such as confirmation of predetermined light emission of the LED, etc.) may be performed. (After this initial action is performed, the above-described effect or the like may be restarted).

Also, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol variation, and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, for example, the special When the symbol variation is restarted, the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect for the special symbol variation that was suspended immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, the power is turned off. A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special pattern that was used (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse production to the horse racing production described later) Developing zone (horse racing production is a special zone that is set with high expectations (for example, expectations are relatively higher than the dialogue production described later))) Waiting display and the special The display effect in the zone is erased, and if the state of the pending display is blue instead of the normal white, the normal white is restored). However, for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed, the prefetch effect may be executed.

Also, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol variation, and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, for example, the special When the pattern change resumes, the look-ahead effect during the special pattern change is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone that was displayed during the special pattern change that was performed before the power was turned off) The standby display and the display effect in the special zone are erased, and if the pending display mode is blue instead of the normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white), but the following The look-ahead effect may be resumed from the special pattern variation (or restore the erased display, or if the pattern is a pattern that promotes the look-ahead effect at the start of the variation, restore it in the display mode after the promotion. can also be used). In this case, the look-ahead effect executed from the next special symbol variation is restarted assuming that, for example, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol variation was not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead performance scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol variation is executed. Moreover, a pattern of a new look-ahead effect may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
An example of processing for restricting execution of the setting suggestion effect will be described below. In the following description, the probability of setting 1 to setting 6 in normal times is 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, 1/190, respectively. Assume that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability variation rate at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning/losing type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. is defined. Also, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used for all settings.

The variation pattern table in FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, the information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning/losing type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. In addition, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach effect that has a high percentage of selection when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and an extremely low percentage of selection when the result of the special lottery is a loss. is. In other words, the expectation of a big hit is high for variations in which Movie Reach is executed. Also, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when a movie reach occurs.

In addition, the "+1 pattern" when the winning type is "lost", which is described in the summary column, means that after the decorative pattern stops in the reach state, the decorative pattern that is fluctuating until the end is in the reach state. Indicates to stop past one decorative symbol. Specifically, for example, after reaching the ready-to-win state with the decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". "+1 pattern" when the win/lose type is "jackpot" means that after the decorative pattern stops in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern that is fluctuating to the end passes one decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach state and temporarily stops. After making it look like this, the decorative pattern stops as the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win state. Specifically, for example, after reaching the ready-to-win state at decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that has been fluctuating until the end is made to appear to have temporarily stopped at "8", and then the decorative pattern stops at "7". and announce the jackpot.

In addition, in the overview column in the example of FIG. 161, "+1 pattern" is selected only when the hit type is "jackpot (non-variable)" among the big hits, but in the case of "jackpot (variable probability)" It may be selected only, or may be selected in the case of "jackpot (non-probability variation)" and "jackpot (probability variation)". In addition, "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the winning/losing type is "lost".

Also, "+pseudo 1" and "+pseudo 2" described in the summary column indicate that a double pseudo-continuous effect and a triplex pseudo-continuous effect are executed, respectively. Pseudo-continuous production is a production that performs the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern multiple times during one fluctuation of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device. . ``Finishing the variation of the decorative symbols'' means, for example, a manner in which part or all of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, a manner in which the player recognizes that the variation in the decorative symbols has ended, and In some cases, pseudo-run symbols (symbols in which a pseudo-run is confirmed when this symbol stops) are stopped. A pseudo-continuous production in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-run pseudo-continuous production. The following natural number) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, while suggesting to the player that there is a possibility that the action may be executed again during one fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, the action is actually executed again. A production that does not perform is called a “pseudo fake production”. In addition, hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect is simply referred to as "pseudo-continuous effect".

Pseudo continuous effect occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the decorative pattern change is executed again during one time fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. When it is decided to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous design in at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU causes a character such as "Continue!" It should be noted that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are odd-numbered or even-numbered and reach-free) may be pseudo-continuous symbols. It should be noted that the pseudo fake effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal variation" or the like. Also, for example, even if the variation pattern is to execute "+pseudo 1", a pseudo-gise effect suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-run in "+pseudo-2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored, for example, in the peripheral main control ROM. The final pending color table is, for example, the display color of the pending display at the end of the variation for each variation pattern (special lottery result winning/losing type, variation pattern identifier, and outline of the variation pattern production) (hereinafter referred to as the final pending color ) and the selectivity.

In addition, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a reserved display area showing the numbers of the reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the start-up winning process of step S116 in FIG. The peripheral control MPU displays the number of reservations indicated by the number-of-holds designation command in the reservation display area.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the number of reservations specified from the number of reservations designation command (the number of reservations stored) is increased. , to display one additional reserved display in the reserved display area. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns) based on the reserved display (start condition is satisfied), the number of reservations (the number of reservations stored) specified by the number of reservations designation command is reduced. , delete the relevant pending display in the pending display area.

It should be noted that the hold display may have a plurality of display modes. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of holding display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereafter, it is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the special lottery result corresponding to the reserved display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow as the colors of the reserved display. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow-colored pending display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big win.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Further, the peripheral control MPU responds to the pending display by, for example, changing the display mode of the pending display during the display period from when the pending display is displayed in the pending display area to when the pending display is erased. It is possible to execute a holding advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns).

Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the pending display, a pending change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the pending display may change can be executed. In addition, the suspension change effect and the suspension notice effect during the display period of the suspension display and before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension are also called a suspension look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, the pending notice table defines, for each final pending color, the change timing of the display mode of the pending display and the display mode (display color) of the pending display at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the change, and the end time of the special symbol variation after the winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing.

In addition, it is desirable that the display mode of the reservation display at each change timing is a reservation color having a jackpot expectation less than or equal to the jackpot expectation of the final reservation color. Also, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the pending display does not drop at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue pending display does not change to the white pending display). It should be noted that there may be a different pending notice table for each pending memory number at the time of winning.

It should be noted that, for example, the start of the special symbol variation suspended before the suspension display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the suspension display described above, and for example, during the special symbol variation corresponding to the suspension display , a change timing of the display mode of the pending display may be provided.

It should be noted that the look-ahead effect including the pending look-ahead effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the starting entrance winning process of step S116 in FIG. be.

Hereinafter, the preliminary determination processing in the start opening winning processing for the first special symbol will be described. In addition, since the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares a pre-determination table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number to determine whether or not a big hit will occur. The type of the big win, and when the big win is not achieved, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big win, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Mode type of game production to be executed, etc.), type of special random number acquired (first special random number), and pending memory number (value of pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number set the pre-determined command. For example, in the production pre-determination process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number. .

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning has occurred, a special symbol based on the starting winning that has occurred Whether or not the display result of the fluctuation display is a big win, if it is a big win, the type of the big win, if it is not a big win, whether or not to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of Setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retained color is determined by the final retained color table of FIG. is an example of a table showing FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of Setting 3 in a similar case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in a similar case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the pending display of the higher jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the expectation of a big hit for each color. These appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and for the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used for all settings. It is assumed that there is

Note that the peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, the selection rate of the final reserved color table of the final reserved color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the expectation of the big win in the same display mode of the reserved display. As a result, for example, when a big win is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the degree of expectation for the high setting is further increased, so that the player can get an exhilarating feeling.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most frequently selected, the final pending color of the final pending color table is changed so that the lower the setting, the higher the expectation of the big hit, for the same pending display display mode. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation when the pending display mode is red is 50% for setting 1, which is a low setting, and 30% for setting 6, which is a high setting. %). As a result, for example, even if a big hit is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the degree of expectation for the high setting is high, so that the disappointment of the player is suppressed and the continuation of the game is encouraged. can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most frequently selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the final pending color of the final pending color table so that the jackpot expectation is substantially common in all settings may be set. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final reserved color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the reserved display. Also, for example, when a big win is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the display mode of red, the possibility of low setting can be prevented from occurring.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The advance notice effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The advance notice effect table holds, for example, the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the effect of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effects include dialogue effects, weather change effects, and rival horse effects. The dialogue effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and says a line in the variation. The weather change effect is, for example, a effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes during the change. The rival horse presentation is a presentation in which a rival horse of the horse raised by the main character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation.

It should be noted that it is possible to execute setting suggestive effects using advance notice effects, and the advance notice effect table stores the selection rate of each advance notice effect depending on whether or not the setting suggestive effects are executed. "No set" in the example of FIG. 165 indicates that the setting suggesting effect is not executed, and "with set" indicates that the setting suggesting effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the announcement effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the announcement effect table.

Incidentally, in each of the advance notice effects in each variation pattern of the advance notice effect table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate of the presence of the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect occurs frequently. This is because, in this state, if the occurrence frequency of setting suggestion effects suggesting a high setting is low, there is a high possibility that the player will stop playing the game in a short period of time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, which is set at a low level, is significantly lowered, which may impose an excessive burden on the pachinko parlor. Conversely, for example, when the frequency of occurrence of setting suggestion performances suggesting high settings is high, the number of players who guess that other pachinko machines 1 in the hall are set low increases, and the other pachinko machines 1 operate. There is a risk that the rate will drop and impose an excessive burden on the hole.

In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation of a big hit. , the selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, for the variation patterns whose outlines are "SP reach", "SP reach + pseudo 1", and "SP reach + pseudo 2", pseudo setting suggestion effects are set so that the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is substantially the same. is determined. As a result, although the degree of expectation for a big hit is low for a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-runs, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low compared to the variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-runs, so the player is encouraged to increase the number of pseudo-runs. We can also be interested in the fluctuations of small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggesting effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggesting effect increases as the number of pseudo repeats increases. The selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting-suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting-suggestion effect is high. Note that if the appearance rate of setting-suggestion effects is increased as the number of pseudo-runs decreases, the above-described problem may occur. It is desirable to set the numbers to approximately the same values (specifically, for example, if the dialogue effect is set when variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of failure, it is 15/256, and if the dialogue effect is set when variation pattern 6 is selected, 16/256, etc.).

In addition, a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win (or a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, but a performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for the produced performance (for example, a performance with a degree of expectation for a big win equal to or higher than a predetermined value) ), the selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. Specifically, for example, in the order of "normal fluctuation", fluctuation including "normal reach", fluctuation including "SP reach", and fluctuation including "movie reach", so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases, A selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 165, there is a possibility that the setting suggesting effect will occur in all of the advance notice effects (dialogue effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). may exist.

Also, if the outline of the variation pattern is the same, the special lottery result is a big hit without a probability change than the case where the special lottery result is a big hit with a probability change. A selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggesting performance is increased in the case of winning a jackpot with no probability variation, and the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the probability variation is not provided can be reduced. In the above example, the three types of advance notice effects, namely, the dialogue effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect, have been described, but it is needless to say that the number of types is not limited to three.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
In the following, the details of the dialogue effect will be described among the advance notice effects. When the dialogue effect without setting suggestion effect is selected as the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU causes the character A to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has passed since the start of the change. , "What day is it today?" is displayed as the dialogue of character A. Then, the peripheral control MPU, for example, causes character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's dialogue is displayed, and character B's dialogue is "Come on...". is displayed. It should be noted that, for example, the lines of character A and character B may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit of the variation.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from a dialogue production table, which will be described later, when the dialogue effect with the setting suggestion effect is selected as the advance notice effect. For example, the peripheral control MPU displays the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation (for example, two seconds later, that is, at the same timing as the character A appears when there is no setting suggestion effect described above). Character A is made to appear, and "What day is it today?" is displayed as the line of character A. The peripheral control MPU, for example, makes character B appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the dialogue of character A is displayed, and displays the dialogue of the selected character B. The dialogue of character A may be, for example, a dialogue that directly expresses a set value, such as "Do you know the settings for this table today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue effect table. The dialogue effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The dialogue effect table holds the effect type of the dialogue effect and the selection rate of the content of the dialogue of the character B for each setting. Note that the production types include "patterns that are the same until the end" and "patterns that suddenly diverge", and for each of the two patterns, there are "Kamone" lines and "deterministic" lines. .

Each line belonging to the "partially same pattern" contains the same line halfway, and then branches to a different line. In the example of FIG. 166, all of the lines belonging to the "partially same pattern" start with "Come on..." and then branch into different lines. On the other hand, the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch into different lines from the beginning. In addition, it is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "partially same pattern" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern". This is to create a sense of anticipation.

Lines belonging to the "Kamone system" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitely announce the setting. For example, "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "Kamone-type" line suggesting an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even day..." is a "maybe" type of line, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even in odd number settings. However, it is assumed that the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, with regard to other "Kamone-type" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in other settings.

On the other hand, the lines belonging to the "deterministic type" are lines that definitely announce the setting. For example, "Oh! I remember! It's an even number day!" Therefore, the selection rate of the line is 0 in the odd setting, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "Kamane type" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "deterministic type". Assuming that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "deterministic type" is high, there is a good possibility that the high setting will definitely be notified to the player within a short period of time after the start of the game. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, so there is a risk of lowering the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when executing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing a pseudo-continuation, the dialogue suggesting the setting of character B is written in red Dialogue in normal production may be displayed in white letters). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the lines of the expected suggestive effect and the lines of the set suggested effect, so that the two types of effects (the set suggested effect and the expected suggested effect) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. can be made In addition, the expected suggestion production is a production that indicates that the degree of expectation for the big hit in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value. Includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a big win across fluctuations in

It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU may also determine setting suggesting effects for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although not shown. For example, in a setting suggestion effect in a weather change effect, thunderclouds are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and numbers such as "246?" In the setting suggestion effect in the rival horse effect, the combined horse effect of the horse being trained by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and for example, a number such as "135?" ("Kamone system" production that suggests an odd number setting).

In the above example, character A's line in the line production is "What day is it today?" Character B is ``66 points! A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In that case, it is preferable that the B effect (for example, asking for a test score) is more credible than the A effect (for example, asking for a date). Specifically, for example, when A production says, “I feel like it was a day with 6 (maybe)”, the expectation level, which is set to 6, remains at 30%, but B production says “ I feel like it was 66 points (maybe)", the expectation level, which is set at 6, should be 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of the notice effect table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the notice effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the notice effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example in FIG. 165, the advance notice effect table in FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In other words, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the notice effect table of FIG.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected advance notice effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the sorting of setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal variation" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the notice effect. be. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the sorting of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal reach + 1 pattern" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the advance notice effect. is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and advance notice effects such as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the advance notice effect. You may By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that of the table shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of effects in detail. Also, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Concrete example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion effect. 169A, 169B, and 169C are shown in the order of the dialogue production, and are suggested settings when "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" is selected as the dialogue of character B. This is an overview of the production.

In FIG. 169(A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays character B's line "It's a day with 4, 5 or 6!". In FIG. 169(C), the lines are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

169A, 169D, and 169E are outlines of setting suggestion effects when "It's a day with 6!" be. 169 (A), (D), (E) in the order of production, while setting suggestion production is started from the start of the special symbol variation, the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production is during the end of the special symbol variation has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the lines of Character B, "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's a day with 6!" is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B is promoted.

Specifically, for example, for each line in the line production table (line to be finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. may be defined for each The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue rendering table does not hold a scenario in which suggested settings may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's a day with 4, 5 or 6!" desirable.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) may be performed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol variation has been shown, this is not the only option, and the promotion may be performed before the special symbol variation is terminated. Character A appears before character B's dialogue, and an effect is performed in which character A speaks to character B, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an overview of the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170(A), the game ball B has won the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol variation in the state where the special symbol variation is not suspended. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after game ball B enters first start hole 2002, character B's line "4 or 5" appears on main liquid crystal display device 1600.
It's a day with a 6! ” is displayed. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbols that have already changed is indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the prize was won. Alternatively, the character B may be displayed after the character A is displayed. Also, in FIG. 170(B), the number of reservations indicated by the display in the reservation display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. In addition, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 continues to display the lines of character B, "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning starts. At the same time when the special symbol variation starts, the line of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 5 or 6!". In other words, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B is promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is terminated. At the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize, the dialogue of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 6!". In other words, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B is promoted.

It should be noted that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of character B and the timing at which the dialogue changes. Specifically, for example, the dialogue look-ahead effect table defines the change timings of character B's dialogue and the dialogue of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the change, and the end time of the special symbol variation after the winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not downgraded at each change timing. It should be noted that there may be a different speech prefetch effect table for each number of pending memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the look-ahead effect based on the advance determination command, for example, at a predetermined rate, it executes the look-ahead effect with reference to the look-ahead effect table. In addition, in the case of promotion, promotion is performed one step at a time in FIG. !”) may be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

Note that the setting suggestion effect may be executed under specific circumstances other than those described above. For example, when the condition of the pending series is satisfied, the setting suggesting effect may be executed. The reserved series means that the next big hit is realized by the special random numbers reserved until the end of the big win game. In this case, for example, after the suspension is performed and before the big win game ends, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern continues for a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Restrictions on setting suggestion effects under specific conditions will be described below.

[12-15-1. Restriction of setting suggestion production after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the occurrence of an error are examples of special states. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values that is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of an effect limit table for the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171(B) is an example of an effect limit table when an error occurs. The effect limit table at the time of setting confirmation mode and the effect limit table at the time of error occurrence are stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restriction of setting suggestion effect after setting confirmation mode]
First, the setting confirmation mode effect limit table will be described. The setting confirmation mode effect restriction table is a setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts during the execution or suspension of the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion variation in this chapter). Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict setting suggestion rendering.

The setting confirmation mode effect limit table is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined to perform the setting suggestion effect) A record 1701 that stores a limit flag when is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion change (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)) and a record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. . Therefore, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode stores a column 1703 for storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode and a restriction flag when the game is progressing even during the setting confirmation mode. column 1704;

In addition, when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by winning a game ball in the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, column 1704 includes column 1705 that stores limit flags in the new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is, for example, an operation medium installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (even an operation medium that the player cannot operate). It can be set by an operation medium that can be operated). It should be noted that, during the setting confirmation mode, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the acquisition of the lottery information and the winning ball may not be performed for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, the already reserved special symbol variation is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode is finished.

When the game stops at the start of the setting confirmation mode, the value of one of the fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the fields 1712 and 1713 One value is 1 and the other is 0, and the values of fields 1714-1717 are 0.

In addition, when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, the value of one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, and the value of the field 1710 is 0. and field 1711 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, fields 1712 and 1713 have a value of 0, fields 1714 and 1715 have a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and The value of one of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

A peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect limit pattern according to a limit flag in each state defined in the effect limit table at the time of setting confirmation mode start and the effect limit table at the time of error occurrence. These restriction patterns are described below.

(1) Regarding the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) After restarting the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and the game results are not affected. can give.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a sound or image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, so that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting even though the setting is high.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggestion effect is started and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1708 is 1 and the value of field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are prioritized over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. . In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggesting effect displayed?" An image indicating the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) Do not execute the setting suggestion effect (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may have a sense of distrust toward the gaming machine, and by not executing the setting suggestive effect, such a situation can be avoided.

(2′) New setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. About the setting suggestion production.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1710 is 1 and the value of field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting performance, the player can be notified that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and can give a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1710 is 0 and the value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if Hall is in doubt about a setpoint and has moved to setpoint confirmation mode, he may change the setpoint later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, while the even number setting is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect, the setting is changed to a different setting There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in the setting suggestion effect later), so trouble may occur between the hole and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

It is desirable that the image, sound, light, etc., indicating the setting confirmation state described above should appear regardless of the field values described above. Also, when the game is stopped after shifting to the setting confirmation state, it is assumed that a new winning prize may be validated.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is finished displaying). And about the case where the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After restarting the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is canceled, the player may have a sense of distrust that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a sound or image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, so that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting even though the setting is high.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is finished displaying). And regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) Continue setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1714 is 1 and the value of field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are prioritized over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. (Display so that the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the characters indicating the setting confirmation mode such as "in setting confirmation mode" do not overlap) ). It should be noted that this display and the like can be processed in the same way even when an error occurs, which will be described later. It should be noted that the term "non-overlapping" as used herein indicates that the appearance from the player's point of view does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggesting effect displayed?" An image indicating the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may have a sense of distrust toward the gaming machine, and by not executing the setting suggestive effect, such a situation can be avoided.

(4') A new game corresponding to winning at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started after the setting suggestion change is started and the setting confirmation mode is started, and the game is progressing even during the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion change.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1716 is 1 and the value of field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting performance, the player can be notified that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and can give a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1716 is 0 and the value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if Hall is in doubt about a setpoint and has moved to setpoint confirmation mode, he may change the setpoint later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, while the even number setting is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect, the setting is changed to a different setting In the subsequent setting suggestion effect, a display confirming the odd number setting is displayed), so trouble may occur between the hole and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode straddles a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after starting the setting confirmation mode When the first pattern is determined or when the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is the setting suggestion variation, the setting suggestion effect is performed along with the variation corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggesting effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and the game results are not affected. can give.

Also, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting is suggested such as "Maybe high setting?") When the effect occurs), the player may have a sense of distrust toward the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggesting effect.

In this way, both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exhibited in both cases. It is possible to provide amusement machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restriction of setting suggestion effect when error occurs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171(B), the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence will be described. The effect limit table at the time of error occurrence is a setting suggestion effect of the variation when an error occurs during the execution or suspension of the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change in this chapter) stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict

The effect limit table at the time of error occurrence includes a record 1801 that stores a limit flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect is started, and an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started in the setting suggestion change. and a record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case where

Errors include a strong error that is reported after the game is stopped and a weak error that is reported while the game is in progress. An error that detects illegal magnetism in the launch ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, a column 1803 for storing a limit flag corresponding to an error notified when the game is stopped, a column 1804 for storing a limit flag corresponding to an error notified while the game is progressing, and a column 1804 for storing a limit flag corresponding to the error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

In addition, if the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, there is a possibility that new setting suggestion fluctuations will be suspended due to the game ball entering the starting hole during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores restriction flags in the new suggested setting variation corresponding to winning the starting port during error occurrence.

In addition, the restriction flag in the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence can be set, for example, at the time of manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, etc., by operating the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (even an operation medium which the player cannot operate can be operated by the player). It can be set by an operation medium).

In the effect restriction table when an error occurs, the value of one of the fields 1806 and 1807 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, the value of one of the fields 1808 and 1809 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, One of fields 1810 and 1811 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, one of fields 1812 and 1813 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of fields 1814 and 1815 has a value of The value of one and the other is zero, and the value of one of fields 1816 and 1817 is one and the value of the other is zero.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion rendering in accordance with the restriction flag for each case defined in the rendering restriction table when an error occurs. These restriction patterns are described below.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) After restarting the game, a setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, and to give the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect may not be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even after the error occurrence (weak error).

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1808 is 1 and the value of field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggesting effect displayed?" An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) Do not execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1808 is 0 and the value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect may not be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2′) In the case where an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even during the occurrence of the error (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to the winning of the starting hole during the error occurrence. About setting suggestion production of variation.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1810 is 1 and the value of field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1810 is 0 and the value of field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting-suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error occurrence, so that the player stops launching the game ball and cancels the error at an early stage.

(3) Regarding the case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After restarting the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is canceled, the player may have a sense of distrust that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect is canceled, which is disadvantageous to the player. can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the occurrence of the error (weak error).

(4-1) Continue setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1814 is 1 and the value of field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?" Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 .

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect is canceled, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can progress smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') In the case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the occurrence of the error (weak error), a new prize corresponding to the winning at the start port during the error occurrence About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion change.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1816 is 1 and the value of field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1816 is 0 and the value of field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting-suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error occurrence, so that the player stops launching the game ball and cancels the error at an early stage.

In this way, both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exhibited in both cases. It is possible to provide amusement machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on production in new start winning prizes]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize during the special symbol variation and in the state where the new variation can be reserved will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start prize effect limit table. The new start prize effect limit table is stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

The new start prize effect limit table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by the assumptions about the performance of the previous variation and the restrictions on the performances in the new starting winnings under the assumptions. It should be noted that the previous change in this chapter is the change immediately before the change corresponding to the new start winning. As a condition for the performance of the previous variation, there are a case where only an expectation suggesting performance is performed as to whether or not the special lottery result corresponding to the variation is a big hit, and a case where both the expectation suggesting performance and the set suggesting performance are performed.

In addition, as a production restriction for the pre-reading production in the new start prize, only the setting suggestion production in the pre-reading production is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion production is not executed), and both the setting suggestion production and the expected suggestion production in the pre-reading production are restricted (that is, the setting Suggestion production and expected suggestion production are not executed)
, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference process table column stores the identifier of the process table to be referred to when executing the look-ahead effect restriction in the new start winning, which is included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores flags indicating which conditions are to be executed and which processing table is used to determine the processing for the look-ahead effect in the new start winning.

1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to one of the processing tables 1-3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1-3. Also, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to one of the processing tables 4-6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4-6. The flags in the new startup prize effect restriction table are, for example, the operation media installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, etc. It does not matter).

When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start winning during the special symbol variation and in a state where the new variation can be suspended, and that only the expected suggestive performance is executed in the previous variation, the new start winning performance restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column storing 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column, and determines the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU, when there is a new start winning during the special symbol variation and in a state where the new variation can be suspended, and when the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are executed in the previous change, the new start win By referring to the processing table corresponding to the flag column in which the value of the "previous variation effect" column of the effect restriction table corresponds to "expectation suggestion + setting suggestion" and which stores 1 as a value, a new Determine the contents of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the start winning prize.

Each condition indicated by the condition column will be described below. The first condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 1) is that when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous change, only the setting suggestive effect is restricted as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is to be done. In the first condition, since the expectation-suggesting effect is performed in the previous variation, the player's feeling of excitement due to the expectation of the big win is heightened. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as a variable prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning, the player's consciousness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the previous variation effect There is a risk that the feeling of exaltation will decrease. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestive effect with the expected suggestive effect, which may make the player feel uneasy. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

In addition, in the first condition, the expected suggestive effect is performed in the previous variation, but in this state, if the set suggested effect is performed as the prefetch effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the player , even if it is assumed that the previous fluctuation will be off, since the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize can still be expected, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security.

For example, when an effect is selected from the advance notice effect table of FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU decides the effect from the table, and then determines whether the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestion effect is restricted is 1 or not. (whether or not to restrict), and if it is 1 (restrict), even if set is selected, the setting suggestion effect is restricted by performing processing to rewrite and display without set. do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion effect using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by executing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold an effect table for each restriction type of effect, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly, in the expected suggestive effect described later, even if a color other than white is selected for the look-ahead pending display using the final pending color table in FIG. Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 2) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion are set as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is to limit both sides of the production. In the second condition, the expectation-suggesting effect is performed in the previous variation, so that the player has a heightened sense of exhilaration due to the expectation of the big win. In such a state, when the setting suggesting effect and the attitude suggesting effect are executed as the variable anticipatory effect corresponding to the new start winning, the player's attention is directed to these effects as well. There is a possibility that the exhilaration in the presentation of the previous variation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

The third condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 3) is that when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous change, the setting suggested effect and the expected suggested effect are set as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Do not limit any of the renditions. In the third condition, since the expectation-suggesting effect is performed in the previous variation, the player has an increased sense of exhilaration due to the expectation of the big win. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as a variable look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, so that in addition to the uplifting feeling for the big hit, the feeling of exhilaration for the setting suggesting effect (especially, the high setting fixed suggesting effect Or when a high setting confirmation effect etc. is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 4) is that when the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are executed in the previous change, the set suggestive effect is set as the prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The only limitation is In the fourth condition, since the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous fluctuation, the player has an exhilarating feeling that he may win a big hit in the previous fluctuation (especially high setting suggestive effect or high setting fixed effect is executed), and feel a sense of elation due to setting suggestions. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the excitement of the expectation for the big win in the suspension of the previous variation may be lowered. .

Specifically, for example, when setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, in the previous change The setting suggesting effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although originally the setting is 5 or higher, it also suggests the possibility of setting 4). In such a case, the player presumes that not only the setting suggestion effect in the previous fluctuation but also the expected suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red There is a possibility that the degree of expectation for a big hit is not high for the reservation that is ), and there is a possibility that the feeling of exhilaration for the expected suggestive performance will decrease. By executing the fourth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The fifth condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 5) is that when the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are executed in the previous change, the set suggestive effect is set as the prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize. and the expected suggestive performance. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect are performed in the previous change, when the setting suggesting effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggesting effect is performed multiple times in a short period of time. There is a risk that the player will guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, if the odd number setting suggesting effect and the high setting suggesting effect are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting is 5). In such a state, if the player determines that the setting is low, there is a risk of stopping the game with the pachinko machine 1, and if it is determined that the setting is high, other pachinko machines in the hall may There is a possibility that the operation of the machine 1 will decrease. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if the expected suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect are performed as the prefetch effect even in the change corresponding to the new start winning, many effects occur in a short period of time. This may confuse the player. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 6) is that when the expected suggestion effect and the set suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, the set suggestion effect is set as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. and expected suggestive renditions. In the sixth condition, since the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous variation, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expected suggestive effect in the settings suggested by the set suggestive effect. In this state, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are performed in the variation corresponding to the new start winning, and there is a possibility that the degree of expectation is raised by these two expected suggestion effects.

Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 4 or more is executed in the previous variation, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning, the player Expectations are assumed at a setting of 4 or higher for the expected suggestive performance in the previous fluctuation. However, after that, since the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning suggests a setting of 5 or more, the expectation level for the expected suggestion effect comes to assume an expectation level of 5 or more, and the player The feeling of exhilaration increases.

In this way, since the effect is exhibited for each of the prefetching effect restriction contents corresponding to the new start winning, the hall etc. can set such prefetching effect restriction contents, so that the needs of the sales style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a game machine that meets the needs.

Each processing table and the look-ahead effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described below. Each processing table is stored, for example, in a peripheral control ROM.

173 is an example of the processing table 1. FIG. First, contents common to each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the type of winning in the special lottery result of the previous change, the processing content related to the new start winning corresponding to the type of winning, and the processing number as the identifier of the processing content.

It should be noted that the processing content held by each processing table defines the processing content for the look-ahead effect that is not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, the processing contents of the processing table 1, which is a table to be referred to when restricting only the setting suggestive effect as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, includes the expected suggestive effect. Processing content is defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3, which is a table referred to when restricting both the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggested effect, as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, include the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect. The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the restricted target look-ahead effect in the new start winning effect and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start winning effect restriction table, and based on the processing table, determines that the target is not restricted. Determines the processing for the look-ahead effect.

Note that the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new starting prize from a plurality of processing content. Note that the flags in the processing table may be operation media provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (either operation media that the player cannot operate or operation media that the player can operate). ) can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start prize defined by the processing table 1 will be described. A processing table 1 is a table referred to when only the expected suggesting performance is executed in the previous variation and only the set suggesting performance is restricted as the pre-reading performance restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which pending prefetching is performed as a prefetching effect for suggesting expectations will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with short working hours. In the processing of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU, if the mode of the pending display of the new start winning is a specific mode with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, the pending display mode of blue, green, red, etc.), for example , At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous variation, the mode of pending display of the new start winning prize is returned to the default (display mode of white in the final pending color table in FIG. 161). However, when the suspension is not displayed in the suspension display area at the start of the opening screen of the big win, the suspension display of the specific mode is erased like the other suspension displays. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the state of the pending display of the new start winning prize to the specific display state (that is, leaves the default display as it is) at the time of time saving shift after the end of the big win. In addition, even if the suspension of the new winning prize has not been completed at the end of the time saving, the peripheral control MPU does not return the suspension display mode of the new start winning prize to the specific display mode (i.e. leave the default view).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 2, when the state of the pending display of the new start winning prize is a specific state in which the expectation of the big win is high, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the big win won in the previous variation, the peripheral control MPU: Restore default display mode for new start wins. However, when the suspension is not displayed in the suspension display area at the start of the opening screen of the big win, the suspension display of the specific mode is erased like the other suspension displays. In addition, even at the time of transition to the normal state controlled after the end of the big win game, the state of the pending display of the new starting prize is not returned to the specific display state (that is, the default display is left as it is).

The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the processing of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the pending display of the new start winning (that is, continues the pending display, specifically, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, continue to display the pending display mode). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the state of the pending display of the new start winning prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small win won in the previous variation. However, when the suspension is not displayed in the suspension display area at the start of the opening screen of the small prize, the suspension display of the specific mode is erased like the other suspension displays.

The process of process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. In the processing of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the pending display of the new start winning (that is, continues the pending display, specifically, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, continue to display the pending display mode).

174 is an example of the processing table 2. FIG. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggesting effect is executed in the previous variation and both the set suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect are restricted as the pre-reading effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be. Since the processing table 2 is a table to be referred to when restricting both the setting suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect as the fluctuation predictive effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the big hit type of the previous change, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

175 is an example of the processing table 3. FIG. The processing table 3 is a table referred to when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous variation and neither the set suggestive effect nor the expected suggestive effect is limited as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be.

The processing of processing numbers 5 and 6 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with short working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 5 and 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 and 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, specifically, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the time reduction accompanying the big win won in the previous variation It is in the process of digesting the second special symbol pending. By the processing of processing number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggesting effect has started before the start of the previous variation, etc., the player can be reminded that the setting suggesting effect will be performed. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. In addition, since the big hit with time saving has been won in the previous variation, there is a high possibility that the variation corresponding to the new winning will start after the end of the time saving (during the time saving, the game ball will (Because when the winning is high frequency and there is a hold of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, the second special symbol variation is executed with priority over the first special symbol variation). Therefore, by the processing of processing number 6, the setting suggesting effect is executed after the end of the time saving, so that the disappointment of the player due to the end of the time saving can be reduced.

The processing of processing numbers 7 and 8 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 7-8 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 7 and 8, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game winning in the previous variation, and the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he did not win in a short period of time even though he won the jackpot, if the processing of processing number 7 starts at the latest during the jackpot game, the disappointment is felt. A big hit game can be enjoyed in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 8, the setting suggesting effect is started immediately after the big win is finished, so that the player's disappointment due to the fact that the reduction of working hours was not provided can be alleviated.

The processing of processing numbers 9 to 10 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 9 to 10, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small win won in the previous variation, or during the small win. In the small win, only a small privilege is given to the player, so the player may be disappointed, but by the processing of the processing number 9, the setting suggestion effect is started at an early timing, and the player is disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times related to small wins is shorter than the series of digestion times related to big wins, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the player may feel distrust. The process of process number 10 can prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. One of the processes with process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 11 to 13, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU, only when the form of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit, the new start During the variation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by Character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player who feels disappointment at the fact that the state of the hold display with high expectation for the big hit has appeared in the previous variation but the game has not come off. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 to be described later, the old suspension is suspension corresponding to the previous variation, and the new suspension is suspension corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 13, if the mode of the pending display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big win, the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a look-ahead effect for the new start winning. Do not perform the performance. Due to the processing of process number 13, even though the state of the pending display with high expectation for the big hit appears in the previous variation, it is lost, and furthermore, even in the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear. , it is possible to suppress the player's addiction to the game.

176 is an example of the processing table 4. FIG. The processing table 4 is a table referred to when the expected suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in the previous variation and only the setting suggesting effect is limited as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. .

The process of process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time saving. In the process of process number 14, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

The process of process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process of process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In addition, since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the big hit type of the previous change, the new start It is defined that special processing is not executed for setting suggestion effects in variations corresponding to winning.

177 is an example of the processing table 5. FIG. The processing table 5 is referred to when both the expected suggesting effect and the set suggesting effect are executed in the previous variation, and both the set suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect are restricted as the pre-reading effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table where Since the processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when limiting both the set suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the type of the previous variation jackpot, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

178 is an example of the processing table 6. FIG. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggesting effect and the set suggesting effect are executed in the previous variation and neither the set suggesting effect nor the expected suggesting effect are restricted as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. table.

The processing of processing numbers 18 to 21 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with short working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 18-21 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, specifically, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the time reduction accompanying the big win won in the previous variation It is in the process of digesting the second special symbol pending. By the processing of processing number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggesting effect has started before the start of the previous variation, etc., it is possible for the player not to forget that the setting suggesting effect will be performed. can.

In the processing of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. If it is better (specifically, for example, it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the setting as a look-ahead effect Only when it is notified that the setting of 5 or more is fixed in the suggesting performance, the setting suggesting performance as the look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, specifically, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the time reduction accompanying the big win won in the previous variation It is in the process of digesting the second special symbol pending.

By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestive performance at the latest during the time-saving jackpot, so that the player can get double exhilaration by the time-saving jackpot and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is notified that a setting of 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and a setting of 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, and the process By the processing of number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. Conversely, for example, when it is notified that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, setting 5 in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning Since there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game even if the above is not notified, the setting suggesting effect is highly likely to be a useless effect. You can omit the performance.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 20, since the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the end of time saving, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment with the end of the time saving state.

In the processing of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion performance is executed during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The process of process number 21 can omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of process number 19, or reduce the player's disappointment with the end of the time saving state.

The processing of processing numbers 22 to 25 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 22 to 25, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game winning in the previous variation, and the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he did not win in a short period of time even though he won the jackpot, he feels disappointed when the setting suggesting performance starts during the jackpot game at the latest by the processing of processing number 22.例文帳に追加A big hit game can be enjoyed in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game winning in the previous variation, and the like. By the processing of the processing number 23, when the setting suggestion performance is started during the big win game at the latest, the big win game can be enjoyed with the disappointment reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 24, the setting suggestion performance is started immediately after the end of the big win, so that the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the game did not start in a short time can be reduced.

In the processing of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion performance is executed during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The process of process number 21 can omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of process number 19, and reduce the disappointment of the player for not rushing into the time saving. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the player who is disappointed that the game does not start in a short time will be shown a further useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk of stroking the person in the opposite direction.

Processing of processing numbers 26 to 29 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26-29 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 26 to 29, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small win won in the previous variation, or during the small win. In the small win, only a small privilege is given to the player, so the player may be disappointed, but by the processing of the processing number 26, the setting suggesting effect is started at an early timing and the player is disappointed. can be reduced.

In the processing of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small win won in the previous variation, or during the small win. The processing of processing number 27 can omit useless setting suggestion performance as explained in the processing of processing number 19, and can reduce the player's disappointment due to only a small merit given in the small win.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times related to small wins is shorter than the series of digestion times related to big wins, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

In the processing of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion performance is executed during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The processing of processing number 29 can omit useless setting suggestion performance as explained in the processing of processing number 19, and can reduce the disappointment of the player that only a small merit is given in the small win. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggesting effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is discouraged that only a small merit is given in the small win is given a further useless setting suggesting effect. This may cause the player to be stroked in the wrong direction.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. One of the processes with process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 30 to 34, the process of the expected suggestive effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. The processing of processing number 30 can reduce the disappointment of the player due to the deviation of the previous variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU, only when the form of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous fluctuation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit, the new start During the variation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by Character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds). By the processing of processing number 31, it is possible to reduce such disappointment for the player who feels disappointment at the fact that the state of the hold display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit has appeared in the previous variation but the game has not come off. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the pending display in the pre-variation pending look-ahead effect is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high degree of expectation for a big win. Only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect, the new start prize During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 32, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player that the previous variation, which was in the mode of holding display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, being a failure, can be reduced by the setting suggesting effect.

In the processing of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU only when the state of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is not a specific state (for example, green or red) with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the new start winning During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 33, the disappointment of the player who has continued to be disappointed because the degree of expectation for the big win cannot be obtained in the pending look-ahead performance of the previous variation can be alleviated by the setting suggestion performance.

In the processing of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU determines the settings suggested in the setting suggestion presentation of the previous variation when the mode of the pending display is not a specific mode (e.g., green or red) with a high expectation of a big win. Therefore, only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is better, during the change corresponding to the new start winning, A setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 34, the state of pending display of the previous variation suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the low expectation and the new start winning, which amplifies the player's frustration. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, in the above-described processing, even under circumstances where setting suggestion effects are not limited as changes in anticipation effects corresponding to new start winnings, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will not limit the setting suggestions. You don't have to perform the performance. For example, when the new start winning is performed during the big win, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because there is a high possibility that the player will continue the game immediately after the jackpot game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the examples of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, each processing related to the new starting prize determined by each processing number is effective, so that the processing related to the new starting winning can be set by the hall or the like. This enables us to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of halls and other business styles.

Also, for example, the new start winning prize is just before the end of the ST state (a probability variable state that continues until the jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol variations are executed) (specifically, for example, a special until the end of the ST state The number of remaining variations in the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the number of remaining variations in the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600). If so, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not the player wins the jackpot in the relevant ST. In such a state, when the setting suggesting effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to the new start winning, the player immediately misunderstands the setting suggesting effect as a performance with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is overjoyed. There is a risk of Occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by the above-described processing.

Also, for example, after the ST state ends and shifts to the normal state, a predetermined number of special symbol variations (specifically, for example, 4 special symbol variations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state Immediately after the transition to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and in consideration of that, the new new When the starting prize is won, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not he or she will soon win the jackpot. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that the variation corresponding to the holding of the second special symbol, which is likely to win the jackpot of a type with great merit for the player, will be executed. In such a state, when the setting suggesting effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to the new start winning, the player immediately misunderstands the setting suggesting effect as a performance with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is overjoyed. There is a risk of Occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by the above-described processing.

In addition, in a plurality of holds, when it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that is completed independently is executed, so that one setting suggestion effect is executed across the fluctuations corresponding to the plurality of holds, In the previous fluctuation You may change setting suggestion production.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 1]
Another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described below. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972 .

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on. The power-on process shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of steps S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 and the level of the signal of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in the register (step S201). It should be noted that determination of whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated is made by the main control MPU 1311 in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably activated. Therefore, if the hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM will be cleared in an unintended state by the hall employee. Switch 954 and setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends, By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power will not be turned on. To reliably detect operation of a RAM clear switch 954 or a setting key 971 at the time of input operation.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be switched to have a positive/negative logic so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at High level and the setting key 971 is ON at Low level. Also, the voltage for determining ON may be changed between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 . By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat by changing the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves and activating the setting change mode. In addition, as will be described later, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 in which settings can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the values of workpieces in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the setting value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, and initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is waited for (step S203). Since the settings are not in the range where the checksum is calculated and are not erased by the RAM clear operation, erroneous settings are not corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the processing related to the normal game such as a special figure or a normal figure is not executed.

In addition, the set value is determined not only when the power is turned on, but also when winning a prize at the start gate, starting a variable display game, and when the game state changes (normal state to big hit state, low probability state to high probability state). , from a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.) is also determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This prevents the lottery from being performed based on the erroneous set value even if the set value is erroneously abnormal.

If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the game is stopped and the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) state is maintained until the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. . If the set value is determined to be abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting may be used to update the setting value storage area.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning on the power again. This is because a RAM abnormality may be caused by fraud as well as a defect, and if a RAM abnormality caused by fraud can be resolved by turning on the power again, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since operation of the setting key 971, which can only be operated by the hall employee who has the key, is included, security performance against fraud can be enhanced.

In addition, in order to cope with fraudulent acts of changing the set value to an indeterminate value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to setting 1, which indicates the lowest setting, will prevent the security of the game machine. It is effective because it can improve performance.

The setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 201(B), is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. , the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, it waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and stored in step S48. A fixed value check code may be used instead of the checksum. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the power failure flag value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

As a result of the determination, if either the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and all areas of the main control RAM 1312 (setting (including areas where values are stored) are initialized (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is called "initialization", but "RAM clear" is also used in the same sense.

On the other hand, if the checksum and backup flag area values are normal, the setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. determine whether If it is not a setting change operation (both or one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is OFF), it is set in the setting state management area in order to determine whether the state is in the process of changing the setting before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating that it is being changed is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that a setting change operation has been performed, it means that the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated to enter the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. state can be determined. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, the value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), initializes the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal (step S210), and proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when shifting to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. In this case, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting change is performed in the setting state management area. The value (02H) indicating the state may not be recorded.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether the state of is during RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the state before power-on is not RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), so the ON level of RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, since the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and setting state management area In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the ON operation level of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, so the power-on status buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the game state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. A value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each part when the power is turned on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 to continue initial setting. On the other hand, if the setting state management area does not record a value indicating a game-startable state, the normal game cannot be started.

In step S220, the initial setting at the time of game start or the initial setting at the time of power failure recovery is performed. After that, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each unit when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, it stores in the buffer in order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of power failure recovery (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on recovery destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in timer interrupt processing.

Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), interrupts are permitted (step S224), and the routine proceeds to a normal main loop (eg, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that setting change processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base indicator 1317 is to be turned on, that is, which digit to display. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, as many LED common counters as the number of indicators should be provided.

Thereafter, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (a value indicating a game-startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (the value indicating the game-startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute the setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in the timer interrupt processing, so normal timer interrupt processing is performed. (for example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) are executed (step S233). In normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, performance display processing (FIG. 183), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (the value indicating the game-startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game processing is not executed in the timer interrupt processing, but the setting change/confirmation processing is executed.

In the setting change/confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation to change/confirm the setting value has been performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (a value indicating setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area), or if the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, the setting change/confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended, and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode ending process, as shown in FIG. (step S241), to send a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part at the time of power-on (game state such as low probability / high probability, time saving / non-time saving, etc.) is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, it stores in the buffer in order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after the power failure (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing state of the special symbol/special electric accessory (the state of each process (waiting, fluctuating, judging, jackpot, etc.) regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory is transmitted as a command. . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state related to the special symbols and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, a setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

It should be noted that the command for notifying the setting value may be sent not only at the time of power-on, but also at the start of fluctuation or when the game state is switched. At that time, the setting value command transmitted when the power is turned on and the command transmitted during the normal game such as when the fluctuation starts may be the same command or different commands (for example, different upper byte values).

When the set value command is different between when the power is turned on and when the normal game is played, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variation display game. When received, determine if the command is missing. By changing the content of the command depending on the timing at which the command is sent (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether the set value is correctly received when the power is turned on, or when the variation starts. It can be determined whether the variation pattern command or the design command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display an error on the base indicator 1317 (or the setting indicator 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S246). On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base indicator 1317, and step S24
6 or the segment signal output according to the setting in S247 causes the base indicator 1317 to light up (step S248). In this way, after the start of the timer interrupt processing, the set value change operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of set value). ). The setting value is displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, instead of performing processing related to setting change/confirmation as processing when the power is turned on, by performing it in the same timer interrupt processing as when a normal game is started, setting change/confirmation processing is executed. Even if power is restored after a power failure occurs and the setting key 971 is returned to its original state, the settings at the time of power failure can be restored even if the setting key 971 and setting change switch 972 are not operated to the same positions as when the power failure occurred. It is made possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Furthermore, in the setting change/confirmation processing, processing that is also executed in normal game processing, such as command transmission processing and control of dynamic lighting of LEDs, can be made common.

Then, the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. are actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181). may be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal game state and the setting change mode and/or setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, a common subroutine may be called in each timer interrupt process), or all may consist of different routines. That is, timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, and timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state. It has a process (module) that is executed and a dedicated process (module) that is executed only in one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing outputs from various detection switches such as a winning hole sensor, a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the like.

Further, the processing executed in the normal game and the processing executed in the setting change mode may share a register bank. When bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, they can share one register bank. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank. 1 (during normal game) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) which is periodically executed, and at least two of the main control side main processing and timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2 are common. bank of registers.

The timer interrupt processing executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may be executed in different cycles. Since only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are sampled for the switches in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode, the execution period of the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is 4 ms, but it is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of timer interrupt processing may be early (eg 2 ms) or late (eg 8 ms). It should be noted that if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LEDs that display the set values will be delayed, and the display mode of the set values will differ from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight common LEDs, if the execution cycle of timer interrupt processing is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms). The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time is lengthened in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the lighting flicker of the LED is increased, so that the base display during the normal game is displayed. can be recognized differently.

Also, when starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power activation, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when starting in the normal game state (does not shift to setting change/confirmation mode) when power is turned on, timer interrupt process 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited and timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted. At the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt process 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of performance display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. In performance display processing, the performance (for example, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317 .

The performance display process is executed in the above-described normal game state timer interrupt. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 and the base display unit output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), saves the register used in the game control area in the register saving buffer (step S261). In step S261, the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. It should be noted that the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM1312.

After that, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and when the area outside the game control area is initialized, 5AH is set. be done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digits of the base indicator 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area in step S264 initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal, or the value of each parameter is not within a predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( step S265).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the switching time of the section for base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). and,
Control the display for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes display of test sections with less than 500 out-balls, and flashing display when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 6000) ( step S269).

After that, restore the value of the register from the register saving buffer (step S270), restore the stack address in the game control area (step S271), and end the performance display process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is notified to the pachinko machine staff. Clearly communicate the status.

Note that the notification mode (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) described below is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with display settings on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to perform the processing.

First, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is reported with priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off, or all LEDs blink at high speed at the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displays the characters "RAM error" with sound (sound effect) Outputs RAM abnormality notification sound (RAM abnormality notification sound changes settings) It may be the same as the notification sound other than mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (Voice) Output volume for the voice “RAM error” Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 (top lamp (including ball out and stock notification LED) blinking in red Display panel decoration LED All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Cancellation conditions for output re-notification RAM is cleared or power is cycled to peripheral control board 1510

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lighting, or all LEDs blinking at medium speed at the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the characters "setting change in progress" Sound (sound effect) Output sound for setting change mode notification sound (voice) The setting is being changed" output volume a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume independent of the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 and the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED Predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( (including the top lamp, but excluding the out-of-ball and stock notification LEDs) flashing in white Panel decorative LEDs All extinguished External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition Peripheral control board 1510 Received "A001H" as a power-on operation command

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lighting, or all LEDs blinking at low speed at the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the characters "setting confirmation" Sound (sound effect) Output notification sound of setting confirmation mode (notification of setting confirmation mode The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (Voice) Outputs the voice “Settings are being checked” a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Predetermined frame lamps (including top lamps, excluding out-of-ball and stock notification LEDs) blinking in white Display panel decorative LEDs All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Cancellation condition for re-notification of output A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 received "A001H" as the power-on operation command.

It is preferable that the notification of the three states described above is performed with the highest priority given to the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312, followed by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode in this order. More specifically, the priority should be determined in the order shown in FIG. Note that priority 1 has a high notification priority, and priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be made, a notification with a higher priority (smaller number) is made. In addition, if the conditions for multiple notifications with the same priority are met and the notifications compete, even if the competing multiple notifications are switched and notified, the notification that was met first is performed, and after the notification is canceled If a competing notification satisfies the conditions, the competing notification may be performed. Specifically, in priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict with each other. At the priority 4, the ball excess abnormality notification and the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification occur at the same time, and the two notifications may conflict.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in the setting change mode 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clear due to setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Prize ball excess abnormality notification when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out When a prize is detected, or when more than a predetermined number of prizes are detected during a single operation of the normal electric accessory, the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification priority 5: the difference between the number of prizes won and the number of discharges of the large winning opening is equal to or greater than a predetermined number 6: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: Door open abnormality notification priority when opening of door frame 3 or body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of winnings are detected continuously when the big winning opening is not in operation, or when winning more than a predetermined number at the time of a single jackpot Big winning mouth prize anomaly notification when detected

Next, the details of the above-described power-on process (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has certainly started up, the hall If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register or the like as temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored later in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2006). If the power failure warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

After that, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 in which settings can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the values of workpieces in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the setting value is not within the predetermined range, the setting value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and a reset signal for the pachinko machine 1 is generated. Wait for initialization by Since the setpoint is not the range over which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the setpoint is an abnormal value it will not be corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In a hall where a pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-working hours) and return to the normal state with a low probability of working hours) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. If the set values are initialized by the RAM clearing operation during business, the power is cut off to continue the business by resetting the set values, the setting change mode is started, and the original set values are set again. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the setting values are maintained without being cleared by the RAM clearing operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. is activated (step S2008). Waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any period from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, even if it is not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2009). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the system waits in step S2009.

Also, it determines whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and stores the determination result in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power failure processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (power-off processing is not normally executed).

Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked out of the register values in which the values of the PF ports are recorded (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined using the values stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 indicating a RAM abnormality is returned to a normal state. By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from steps S2016 and S2019 to step S2031. size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2019). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power supply, changing the settings, and turning on the power supply. That is, if it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is supposed to go through the setting change without fail. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of power failure is RAM abnormality, RAM abnormality can be eliminated only by changing the set value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2020).

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). The process proceeds to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is during setting confirmation, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Steps S2018 to S2022 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2019), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, determination can be made based on the determination result stored in the register in step S2032.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2033), and by the RAM abnormality initialization process, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). The details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random number (for example, win-lose random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, power-on setting processing is executed (step S2038). The details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2039 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). The details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In random number update processing 2, random numbers other than random numbers for judging wins are mainly updated in special lotteries and ordinary lotteries.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, prohibits writing data to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protects game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and prohibited area invalid to the RAM protect register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2046), and wait until recovery from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby enabling access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flow chart of RAM abnormality initialization processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), all registers The value is stored in the register saving buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the value of the first power-on flag when the power is turned on (step S2053). When the power is turned on for the first time means when the power is first turned on as a pachinko machine, and when the power is turned on after the backup power supply is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is removed, the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off and data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

If it is initialization at the time of the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether or not the discharge ball for base calculation is outside the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharged ball for base calculation is out of the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharged ball for base calculation is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range (step S2055). and,
If the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated, and the caller process is returned to.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written to all work areas outside the use area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2056), and 00H is written to all stack areas outside the use area. is written to initialize (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the processing returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and bank switching is performed. Both banks of registers cannot be used without Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area when an interrupt is started, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is restored. If a configuration is adopted in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process to restore bank 0. FIG.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. It should be noted that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Note that switch input processing 1 in step S2062 is processing related to winning signals, and switch input processing 2 in step S2080 to be described later is processing related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2604, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected. Note that even if winning is detected, prize ball payout, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and that fraud is not detected.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, for changing the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the minor symbol to be updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

After that, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). At step S2067, only the game state error signal is turned ON, and other signals are turned OFF.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area, which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510 .

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Note that the watchdog timer uses a simple clear mode, so setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2072), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Next, FIG. 191 will be explained. When it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 for detecting the state of a sensor (switch) for fraud detection. (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal from the magnetism detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is read, and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined period of time, Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in switch input processing 2, it is determined whether or not fraud has been detected in the fraud detection processing of step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a winning abnormality such as a large winning opening or an excessive winning of ordinary electric accessories is also determined.

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not there is an input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control RAM 1312 . In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), memorize to Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to the command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Also, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, it generates a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning anomaly, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program creates a prize-winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

Subsequently, a switch-passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of the passage of various switches relating to the winning switch and the starting switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). The base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, save the predetermined data such as the flag register to the stack area in the game control area, the base display It is set so that it is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the big hit symbol random number value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big win random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 . When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged), and a game ball can be received in the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. Then, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. Further, when the variable probability transition condition is established, the state is shifted to the probability variable state after that, and when the variable probability transition condition is not established, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively higher than in the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. A game advantageous to the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or jackpot game When it is in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as an output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output information, a start winning prize information output signal, and a security signal are output to the external terminal board 784 .

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

Also, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2070 in FIG.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of setting processing. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area does not indicate the normal game state (00H), and mainly executes the process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the caller without executing the setting process.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special design and the normal design is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be corrected by turning off the power once, executing power failure processing, and then, when turning on the power again, by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to activate the setting change mode. Then, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to its original state, the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game can be started.

When the power is turned on again, if an operation other than starting the setting change mode is performed with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and return to the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects whether the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ON to OFF change.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set to the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting processing is executed. (Step S2104), the processing returns to the calling source.

When an operation to terminate the setting change mode (turning off the setting key 971) is performed, by setting an output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is terminated can be set. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal is set to the security signal output timer as the output time value. This ensures that the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, when the hot start is performed in the normal game state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops the output of the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored. In the case of hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even if the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510), the timer interrupt process starts. After the transition, output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, there is provided a period during which the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
・When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to fraud detection, etc. ・After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. - After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output in setting change mode, the power is restored and the setting change mode continues. and the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, the hall computer can respond to the security signal by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapse. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may be configured to be used also as the RAM clear switch 954 . As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, it returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. return to the calling process.

When determining whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, even if the setting change mode is in effect at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is not turned ON at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting change switch 972 is turned on. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by an operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of setting display processing. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , return to the calling process.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command, as shown in FIG. 202A, is a command for notifying the contents recorded in the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. Note that other bits should be set to 0 (step S2121). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area is set to 1 is that the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the time of the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If no value indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is abnormal. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it is a state in which a normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2123).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202B, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game can be started based on the contents recorded in the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on recovery destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The return destination command at power-on is, as shown in FIG.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

In addition to the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the setting value command, a special symbol reserve number command indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted, and the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 , the display of the pending number may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. In addition, the order of transmission of the special symbol hold number command is the state command at power on, the return destination command at power on, and the setting value command. may

After that, it returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is executed when the setting change mode is not in the setting confirmation mode when the power failure is restored, or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. , power-on status command, power-on recovery destination command, and set value command) are sent at the time of recovery from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode.

195 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2. FIG. Random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for judging winning in special lotteries and ordinary lotteries.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in random number update processing 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt processing, interrupts are prohibited before the initial value random number update processing so that the initial value random number update processing is not interrupted by the timer interrupt processing. Interrupts are allowed after initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number is a random number for judging the jackpot to draw the jackpot of the special pattern, the random number to draw the hit of the normal pattern, the type of pattern at the time of the special pattern jackpot (low probability / high probability / short time / non-short time etc.) ) is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle.

After that, the random numbers (excluding the initial value random numbers) other than the winning random numbers are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. 181 and 182, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, it is preferable that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not switch the confirmation mode, but only has a function as an operation for changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes the switch input process 3 (step S2141). Details of the switch input process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. do. In step S2141, instead of switch input process 3 described in FIG. 197, switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied.

Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change/confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083), fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084), and switch passage command output processing is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the processing before the interrupt is restored. do.

197 is a flowchart of switch input processing 3. FIG. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the top address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of repetitions of the process from the switching winning information data (step S2161). The number of repetitions of the process is the number n of blocks in the switch winning prize information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switching winning information data is obtained (step S2163). Further, input information is read from the obtained input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning prize information data (step S2165).

Thereafter, referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S2166). Then, if it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, you can get the bits of the input port that are used during normal play.

On the other hand, if it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during setting change/confirmation specified in the switch winning prize information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be obtained from the input ports.

After that, the input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area specified by the switch winning prize information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as switch winning prize information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all switch input ports is completed (step S2172). When it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has been completed, the switch input processing 3 is terminated and the processing before the interrupt is returned to.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning prize information data table.

The switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (where n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block contains an input port address, a logic correction value, and a normal game mask. value, mask value during setting change/confirmation, and address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n pairs of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area, it is not designated as the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged continuously, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. Although the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area are 16-bit (2-byte) values, they are set as the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be the lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the values of the input level data area and the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. can be reduced.

Fig. 199 shows another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, Fig. 199(A) shows a configuration example of the switching winning information data table used in the normal game state, and Fig. 199(B). shows a configuration example of a switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (where n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block contains an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal game state and the switching winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports with different logic correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask values are different between the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, but the switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. uses different switch winning information data tables in the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and in the normal game state, making it possible to acquire different switch winning information data.

In order to accommodate such a configuration, switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether it is the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal game state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the determination result. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data without determining whether it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in step S2167.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIGS.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (00H) indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation process is terminated, and the process before the interruption is returned to. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065), the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2. FIG.

A switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, bit 7 detects an acknowledgment signal (ACK) from payout control board 951 at level 1 . At bit 6, at level 0, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected. At bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Bit 4 has a signal level of 0 when the setting key 971 is turned on. At bit 3, the signal level becomes 1 when the door open sensor detects that the door frame 3 is open. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetism detection switch (magnetism detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area.

The setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 201(B), is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. not Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 .

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 08H to 02H, and the setting change mode is terminated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the contents recorded in the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte being A0H, and the lower byte indicating the content recorded in the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error in which the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is generated once at hot start, RAM clear, and RAM failure, and is generated twice in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, at power-on processing and at the end of setting change/confirmation.

Upon receipt of the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification in the manner described above according to the setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, and RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H as the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and the game action (effect etc.) corresponding to the game command is not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), there is a possibility that the peripheral control board 1510 has missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to release the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in a state where the game commands are invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed for symbol movements, lamps, movable bodies, sounds, etc.). ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify the occurrence of an inconsistency in the game state. Also, the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified with a low volume. If no effect is performed until a predetermined condition is met, the player who cannot understand that the game state is inconsistent will not start the special symbol variation display game even if he/she wins the starting gate. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the pachinko hall due to the pachinko machine 1 malfunctioning. In addition, even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal game processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are normally displayed. be done.

FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on status command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the contents recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when the power-on status command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code for each pachinko machine model may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight different series. Note that the power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before power failure).

FIG. 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on recovery destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to special symbols. show. The power-on return destination command notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of power failure. The power-on recovery destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202D is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The set value command is sent at the time of recovery from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is transmitted at the time of the start of special symbol fluctuation, or at the time of change in the game state (at the time of start and end of big hit, probability variation, time reduction, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the setting value command transmitted when the power is turned on, the setting value is changed to the correct setting value in the subsequent game (for example, the start of fluctuation of the special symbol), so that the setting value is incorrect. Rendering is not performed based on the value. Effects based on set values are effects that suggest set values using effects devices such as display devices, lamps, sounds, and movable bodies. It suggests a set value by generating it. This set value suggesting effect may be effected in other aspects than the effect illustrated below, and may include a fake. As a set value suggesting effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the set value, or changes the pattern variation mode from normal (for example, changes in the left and right middle pattern). The timing of start and confirmation will be different from normal (normally, each pattern starts to change at the same time, and when set to high, changes start in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), voice is used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability when the starter wins, or a different sound will be generated during the production (a male voice at normal time, a female voice at high setting) voice), etc.

FIG. 203 shows commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state regarding special symbols/special electric accessories, and m is a value corresponding to a set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start where the normal game state is started, the operation command at power on (A001H) → state command at power on (3001H) → return destination command at power on (310nH) → set value command (A10mH) sent in order.

Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the operation command at power-on (A001H)→status command at power-on (3001H)→return destination command at power-on (3101H)→set value command ( A10mH).

In the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H)→power-on state command (3001H)→power-on recovery destination command (3101H)→setting value command (A10mH) is transmitted in this order.

In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the setting value is confirmed, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) is sent. → Power-on status command (3001H) → Power-on recovery destination command (310nH) → Setting value command (A10mH).

In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, the operation command (A009H) at power-on is first transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. A power-on action command (A003H) is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the operation command at power-on (A001H)→state command at power-on (3001H)→return destination command at power-on (3101H)→setting value command (A10mH) in this order. sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted. ) is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the operation command at power-on (A001H)→state command at power-on (3001H)→return destination command at power-on (3101H)→setting value command (A10mH) in this order. sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in the normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) indicating power restoration is sent to the peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is sent to the control board 1510 . For this reason, when it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the series of commands from A001H to A10mH have been received, and part of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It determines that the normal game state cannot be started, and informs that the normal game state cannot be started.

That is, in the same way as the above-described effect when the game command is disabled, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, symbol movements, lamps, movable bodies, voices, etc. are received.) The effect corresponding to the given command may be performed), and the occurrence of inconsistency in the game state may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp.

In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game compensates for the set value command that was missed when the power was turned on, and the normal game is started. You may

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the setting value command, when the power of the peripheral control board 1510 is turned on, the setting value command is set to a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the setting value. It may be updated to the setting value corresponding to the command.

Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game start-ready state, and are normally transmitted in succession. Sending to the board is sufficient.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing state transition of values set after power restoration from the state before power shutdown in the setting state management area.

The operation of a pachinko machine having a setting function when the power is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or whether the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns considering convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An operation example in which the normal game state (VALID_PLAY=00H) is in effect at the time of power interruption immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from power failure, as shown in FIG. 204(A), will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the region that will be used as a region. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Also, the base display 1317 displays the current set values for setting confirmation.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including the stack area for all areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. In addition, even if all the storage contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least the area where the information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (the storage where the information about the game is stored) Areas (special symbols, areas related to normal symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (fluctuation pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained, and it is necessary to return to the game state before the power failure. After the power is restored, the area in which the information that is not stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in an operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set at the time of power interruption immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from the power failure, operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is performed when the power is turned on. Whether or not the setting key 971 is operated or not, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area including the stack area other than the set value and the base value. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in pattern 2-1 is to initialize the area used as the game control area including the stack area together with the storage area initialized by the initialization process that has already been executed at the time of power failure. good. For example, if the power is interrupted during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage areas that have not been initialized may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power failure occurs during the initialization process, an area (for example, a RAM clearing flag) is provided to store whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized, and while the RAM clearing flag is set It is preferable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

Further, the process of monitoring power failure may be repeatedly executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a timer interrupt may be used to monitor the power failure warning signal.

Whether the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process are executed as common processing in any of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or executed as separate processing, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. Common processing may be executed in the mode, and different processing may be executed in the normal game state. That is, out of three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine, at least two states may share the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is interrupted in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting is always performed. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during setting change work in a hall, the setting change mode should be activated when power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode may not be operated when the power is restored. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the system is started in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When (the setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal game state is started, and when any switch is not operated, the normal game state is started. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is always activated.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the setting change mode is set at the time of the last power interruption and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from the power failure, unlike the pattern 2-1, even if it operates in another pattern shown in FIG. 204(C). good. If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and if the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. initialize the area Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is other than the above, and if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 memory contents are not changed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 . Base indicator 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing normal game processing.

That is, in pattern 2-1, regardless of the state of the setting key or the RAM clear switch after power is restored, the transition to the setting change mode is made unconditionally. When the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to start the setting change mode, the setting change mode is started, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). and That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated at the time of power recovery, the normal game is not started as a RAM abnormality state, and the normal game is played after going through the setting change mode. Start playing. For this reason, when the operation to start the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state other than the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode such as RAM abnormality, and the game stop state is notified. employees may be prompted to activate the configuration change mode.

If the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, without initializing the game control area and the stack area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, until the next setting change operation is performed. Stand by while the game is stopped. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing normal game processing. After that, once the power is cut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
204(D), an operation example will be described in which the setting confirmation mode is set at the time of power interruption immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from the power failure. First, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, and when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control RAM 1312 includes a stack area other than the set value and the base value as a game control area. Initialize the area used. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays the current set values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, like pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an operation example when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of recovery from power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the region that will be used as a region. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. Also, the base display 1317 provides display for setting changes.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at power-on is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at power-on, the main The contents stored in the control RAM 1312 remain unchanged. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. Base indicator 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power interruption immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power interruption, (1) The device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized. (2) Restart the hardware random numbers. (3) It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of (3) setting interrupt permission.

Also, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the last power cutoff, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set before the determination of whether the RAM is abnormal in the state before the power cut (step S211 in FIG. 179). determines whether or not there is an operation of When a setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated. The RAM abnormal state is maintained regardless of whether the start operation is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or neither is operated. That is, normally, when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are started, the setting change mode processing and the setting confirmation mode processing are executed within the timer interrupt processing. If so, different processes are executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again to recover from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing of the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but the setting confirmation mode is started. When doing so, a process different from normal is executed in the timer interrupt process.

Thus, when the value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using time charts. The outline of the time chart explained below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
・Time chart when transitioning to the setting change mode at power failure with the setting key 971 turned off and the RAM clear switch 954 turned off after the power is restored (Fig. 207)
・Time chart when transitioning to the setting change mode at power failure with the setting key 971 ON and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (Fig. 208)
・Time chart when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure with the setting key 971 turned off and the RAM clear switch 954 turned off after the power is restored (Fig. 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 . Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 above.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above according to the power-on command received.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N+1 to N+2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed within the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1. be.

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after finishing changing the set values. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. (T8). The generated power-on operation command (A0001H) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the main control MPU 1311 ends the lighting of all the function display units 1400 and starts the display in the normal game state. Furthermore, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal game state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly recognized, and operation errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH). Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on recovery destination command becomes 01H. m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D). Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game start-ready state, and are normally transmitted continuously. It is sufficient to send to

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect that the setting is being changed by some effect devices. continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, when the power was cut off just before, the normal game state or setting confirmation mode was in effect, and when the power was turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated and the setting key 971 was turned ON. , the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records and sets 01H in the setting state management area. Go to confirmation mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 . Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the setting values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH). m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on recovery destination command.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect that the setting is being changed by some effect devices. continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode because it is in the setting change mode at the time of power shutdown immediately before. As shown in FIG. 204(B), if the setting change mode is set at the time of the last power shutdown, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of power on. Indicates the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 . Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by power interruption, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure and executes the power failure processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In addition, in the power-off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, the power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and a reset due to the power supply (5V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is preferable to turn OFF the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , and waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, at timing T13 after the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, the setting change mode is set. transition to When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again in the same manner as the normal setting change mode. In addition, since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and the power failure processing is executed after that, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power failure processing. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clear process at the time of power failure recovery. After re-initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting security signals.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operation state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and updates the setting value after updating. Displayed on the display 1317 .

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after finishing changing the set value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH). m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect that the setting is being changed by some effect devices. continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even if the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode at the time of power shutdown immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 at power on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by power interruption, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure and executes the power failure processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In addition, in the power-off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, the power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and a reset due to the power supply (5V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is preferable to turn OFF the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , and waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the 954 signal. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again. Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. be done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again in the same manner as the normal setting change mode. In addition, since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and the power failure processing is executed after that, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power failure processing. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clear process at the time of power failure recovery. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is during setting change, YES is obtained in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute RAM abnormality initialization processing (step S2034). RESET_P_7 (S203 in FIG. 187)
If the process branches to 6), the state before the power shutdown is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization processing step S2034. After re-initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting security signals. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting change mode is started when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. Even if it is not ON, the setting change mode can be activated.

As indicated by a broken line at timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded, and the game may be restarted in a state in which the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed at the time of power return, the device is restarted in the state of RAM abnormality. In other words, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by power interruption, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and updates the setting value after updating. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after finishing changing the set value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH). Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on recovery destination command becomes 01H. m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game start-ready state, and are normally transmitted in succession. Sending to the board is sufficient.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect that the setting is being changed by some effect devices. continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is set at the time of the last power-off, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at power-on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure, executes the power failure processing, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In addition, in the power-off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, the power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and a reset due to the power supply (5V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off processing. In addition, it is preferable to turn OFF the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , and waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again. Since the value (01H) indicates setting confirmation, at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, the controller is restarted in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of 01H is maintained in the setting state management area. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, if the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started. can also start the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

During the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and even if the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is displayed on the base display without updating the set value. Continue to 1317 to display.

After confirming the setting values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time has passed since it was known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started. may In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect that the setting is being changed by some effect devices. continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing configuration examples of the big hit determination threshold table. The big-hit determination threshold value table stores the hit-determination threshold value of the big-hit determination random number value for lottery for the big win of the special symbol.

The big hit threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 is composed of a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big-hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of judging a big-hit when the random number value for big-hit determination is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table stores a threshold for low probability (normal state) and a threshold for high probability (variable probability state).

When judging a big hit, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select a threshold judgment table for the current set value. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold value for big hit determination is acquired from the selected threshold value determination table. When the random number value for judging a big hit acquired at the time of winning of the start opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold value, it is determined as a big win, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined as a deviation.

The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big-hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example of judging a big-hit when the random number value for big-hit determination is within the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each setting value is the lower threshold at low probability (normal state), the upper threshold at low probability (normal state), the lower threshold at high probability (variable state), and the lower threshold at high probability (variable state). Stores the upper threshold.

When judging a big hit, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select a threshold judgment table for the current set value. Then, by using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the block is a low probability block or a high probability block in the selected threshold value determination table, and the lower limit threshold and upper limit for big hit determination Get the threshold. When the random number value for judging a big win acquired at the time of winning the starter is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold and equal to or less than the upper threshold, it is judged as a big win, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold to the upper limit threshold, it is judged as a deviation.

The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for low probability setting value table selection, a determination threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for high probability setting value table selection, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a value judgment threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table, but the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 has a low probability table and a high probability table. configured separately.

The low-probability setting value table selection address table defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each low-probability (normal state) setting value. defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value of high probability (probability variable state). The data defined in each set value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value for low probability stores a lower limit threshold for a low probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold for a low probability (normal state). The determination threshold value table for each set value for high probability stores a lower threshold value for a high probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value for a high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the address table for selecting the setting value table for low probability or the address table for selecting the setting value table for high probability is determined by the probability variable state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability). A set value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the set value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current set value is selected by the acquired offset. When the random number value for judging a big win acquired at the time of winning the starter is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold and equal to or less than the upper threshold, it is judged as a big win, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold to the upper limit threshold, it is judged as a deviation.

[12-17. Example 2 of setting change/confirmation process]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972 .

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). Any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information relating to computation in processing) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used as the register. General-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and bank 0 registers are used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312, and is erased without retaining information at the time of power failure, and is different from the area of RAM where information is backed up at the time of power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has certainly started up, the hall If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register or the like as temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored later in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2206). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

Thereafter, a sub activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires to wait for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2207). Waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any period from power-on to transmission of the first command to the peripheral control board 1510 .

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2208). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the system waits in step S2208.

After that, setting value confirmation processing is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2210). This is because the information used in one process does not affect the other process in order to ensure the independence of the process outside the game control area and the process within the game control area. After that, when the power is turned on, a RAM confirmation process outside the game area is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). The details of the outside-game-area RAM checking process at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2212).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose registers of bank 0 are used in the processing at power-on.

The value set in the setting state management area in Example 2 is different from that shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of example 2 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 .

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 03H to 02H, and the setting change mode is terminated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it determines whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, stores the determination result in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power failure processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (power-off processing is not normally executed).

Then, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting state management area is transferred to the B register. (step S2218) and proceeds to step S2219.

After that, a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the values of the PF ports are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). A general-purpose register different from the register provisionally set in S2213 and S2214 is used as the register in which the value of the PF port is stored. After that, it is determined using the values stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined. As a result, if there is an abnormality either inside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the saved value in the setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from steps S2226 and S2231 to step S2235. In this way, since the values in the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are shared, the caller can be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the size of the program can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power supply, changing the settings, and turning on the power supply. That is, if it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is supposed to go through the setting change without fail. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of power failure is RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only with the change of the set value as a trigger.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on status buffer (step S2227).

After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. . That is, even if the state at the time of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal game state is entered. If the state at the time of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the game may shift to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure instead of the normal game state.

Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, after judging the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226), the operation of the setting key 971 may be judged (step S2228). Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above, it is possible to determine the abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2232), and the outside game area RAM abnormality processing is executed (step S2233). The details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the game area stack area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area is not executed unless the setting is changed. When the RAM is abnormal outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area in the same way as when the RAM is abnormal within the game control area, and the game stops. It is not possible. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the game control area is only a setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the game control area is a setting change and operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM abnormality has occurred). (when the RAM is forcibly cleared by an employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, the setting value and the setting state management area are excluded because if the setting value becomes high due to an illegal RAM clearing operation by the player, damage will occur on the hall side. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during a game with high settings and the game is stopped, the high settings are changed to low settings by the RAM clearing operation, which causes damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). When the power is turned off while commands are stored in the command buffer and the power is turned back on without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer are sent. For example, when the power supply is interrupted during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command is transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, when only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if a command that has not been transmitted during the setting change process is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting process is transmitted after the power is restored, so that the peripheral control board 1510 There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state by In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change process and when starting the setting confirmation process. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number (for example, win-lose random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random numbers in step S2238, the hardware random numbers are updated even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. may Then, power-on setting processing is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing. The setting value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213) to determine whether the setting value in the setting state management area is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range. do. Note that the setting value confirmation process may be executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, in addition to when the power is turned on. Also, it may be executed at the start of special symbol variation, or at the time of change in the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, probability variation, time reduction, etc.).

In the setting value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). Since 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area as shown in FIG. 220A, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 in which settings can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the values of workpieces in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined to be outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to power-on processing. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to power-on processing.

Regarding the values and setting values recorded in the setting state management area, whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is also determined during the game progress (at each start of fluctuation, at the time of game state switching, etc.). For this reason, the conditions for determining that there is a RAM abnormality related to the setting state management area and setting values during the game, and the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area within the game area excluding the setting state management area and setting values, and the The two conditions for determining that the work RAM is abnormal are different. Part of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the setting state management area and the set value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partly the same.

The reason why the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different is that if the RAM abnormality determination regarding the setting value is performed only when the power is turned on, if the setting value is changed due to fraud or malfunction due to noise, etc. This is because it is desirable to detect the abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period during which the disadvantage occurs.

In addition, by subroutineing the RAM abnormality determination processing related to the setting state management area and the set value during the game, the same program can be used in a plurality of ways by calling the subroutine and determining the RAM abnormality as necessary during the game progress. It is possible to reduce the size of the program without providing it in place.

Also, the setting state management area is not subject to RAM abnormality determination at power-on, but may be handled in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312 as a RAM abnormality determination subject. By setting the setting state management area as a target for RAM abnormality determination at power-on, if the setting change mode is set before the power failure and RAM abnormality is determined at the time of power recovery, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the values recorded in the setting state management area if an abnormality (that is, a RAM abnormality) occurs in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in which the setting value is stored in the main control RAM 1312 may be a target for RAM abnormality determination at power-on or may be excluded from RAM abnormality determination.

In addition, regarding the order of priority in the determination at the time of turning on the power, the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal game state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode and executing RAM clear processing by a RAM clear operation. By executing the determination process in the order of priority of the derived states in this way, it is possible to accurately derive the state with the highest priority even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flow chart of the outside-game-area RAM checking process when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the outside game area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power on process (FIG. 213), and the abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in the register saving buffer outside the game area (step S2262). It should be noted that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5AH, it can be determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized due to the first power-on or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time, etc., the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. In addition, RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined at S2231 based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area at S2266.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2267), and the LED blink cycle timer is set to the blink cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking the upper two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and when the LED blinking cycle timer times out, it becomes one blinking cycle. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317. When the mode switching time timer expires, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is initialized by setting 0 (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and stored in the SP save buffer outside the game area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to power-on processing.

FIG. 217 is a flow chart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing. The RAM abnormality time process outside the game area is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the value of the stack pointer outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2281), All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). It should be noted that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the RWM initialization process outside the use area is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use area RWM initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the outside game area RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal in step S2231 when the power is turned on next time.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching timer is set to the mode switching time timer. A switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying base values on base display 1317 .

Then, all the register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , returns the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area (step S2289), and returns to the power-on process of the caller.

FIG. 218 is a flow chart of RWM initialization processing outside the used area. The RWM initialization process outside the use area is executed in step S2283 of the outside game area RAM abnormality processing, and initializes the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 .

First, the main control MPU 1311 initializes by writing 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2290). Then, 00H is written in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2291). After that, it returns to the outside game area RAM abnormality processing.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing. The power-on setting process is a subroutine and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to perform initial settings when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 220B, the power-on operation command is a 2-byte command that notifies the recording contents of the setting state management area. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the area value.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. Note that other bits should be set to 0 (step S2301). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area is set to 1 is that the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the time of the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If no value indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is abnormal. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it is a state in which a normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2304).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte indicates the state before the power failure.

Then, a power-on recovery destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a 2-byte command that notifies the game state related to special symbols. The state of the pattern and the operation state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on recovery destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

Further, a setting value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). The setting value command, as shown in FIG. 202(D), is a 2-byte command for notifying a setting value, where the upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the setting value.

In addition to the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the setting value command, a special symbol reserve number command indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted, and the number of reservations is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The state before the power failure may be restored. In addition, the order of transmission of the special symbol hold number command is to be transmitted during the transmission of these commands even after the transmission of the power-on state command, the power-on recovery destination command, and the setting value command, even before the transmission of these commands. may

After that, it returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of whether the mode is the setting change mode. again,
The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when it detects that the setting key 971 is turned OFF and ends the setting change/confirmation process. At this time, 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, so all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When executing the setting change/confirmation process, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, if the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is sent to allow the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM error, etc.). Peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the command, performs notification corresponding to a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM abnormality, and the like.

In the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the hall employee (peripheral board box 1520 adjustment of the volume and brightness by the volume provided in the device) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

In addition, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display whether it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state. . In this case, a voice message may be output indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, some or all of the lamps (which may include the lamps provided on the door frame 3) may be used for notification.

FIG. 220B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 202A, in Example 2, the lower byte becomes 04H when a RAM error occurs.

Specifically, the power-on operation command consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte being A0H, and the lower byte indicating the content recorded in the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error in which the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, a command A001H or A004H is created once in response to a hot start, RAM clear, or RAM abnormality, and a command A002H or A003H is created in power-on processing in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. After that, it is generated twice as the A001H command, once upon completion of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the above-mentioned Notification is performed in the manner in which the information is displayed (see FIG. 184). Although not shown in FIG. 184, the notification of the state in which the normal game can be started is performed by displaying a demo screen or performing a standby state to explain the contents of the game.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H as the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and the game action (effect etc.) corresponding to the game command is not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), there is a possibility that the peripheral control board 1510 has missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to release the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in a state where the game commands are invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed for symbol movements, lamps, movable bodies, sounds, etc.). ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify the occurrence of an inconsistency in the game state. Also, the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified with a low volume. If no effect is performed until a predetermined condition is met, the player who cannot understand that the game state is inconsistent will not start the special symbol variation display game even if he/she wins the starting gate. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the pachinko hall due to the pachinko machine 1 malfunctioning. In addition, even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal game processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are normally displayed. be done.

FIG. 220C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on status command. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 202B in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of example 2 defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the contents recorded in the power-on state buffer, and for notifying the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on status command consists of 2 bytes. If the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. Also, if the lower byte is 02H, the state before the power failure is a low probability/non-time saving state, and the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, indicating that the normal game can be started. Also, if the lower byte is 03H, the state before the power failure is a high probability/time saving state, and the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, indicating that the normal game can be started. Also, if the lower byte is 04H, the state before the power failure is a low probability/time saving state, and the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, indicating that the normal game can be started.

As described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing information on the game state at the time of the power failure in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred. , the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low-probability non-shortening of working hours, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. Also, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is 0, so the power-on state command stores 1 and can notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored in the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, if the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period in which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred in

If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game area (step S2314), the power OFF processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). The details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the game area stack area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is held normally, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and prohibited area invalid to the RAM protect register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. Therefore, by invalidating the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and access to the entire area is enabled. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of processing when the power is turned off. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control-side main processing (FIG. 221), and executes necessary processing before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the value of the stack pointer outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in the register saving buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the outside game area checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power failure process has been executed normally. In this sense, the power down check area and the RAM backup flag in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure process is normally executed, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power down check area, the main control The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure process has been executed normally are provided in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, respectively. . This is because it is determined twice in the game control area and outside the game control area, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, This is because it is desirable to process. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that power failure processing has been performed normally, 5AH is erroneously set to the flag, and if power failure processing is not performed and the power is restored, it is mistakenly assumed that power failure processing has been performed normally. determined by This double determination reduces the possibility of erroneous determination.

Furthermore, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, areas where the lower bytes (**00H to **FFH) or the upper bytes (00**H or 01**H) of addresses do not overlap). Even if the data is rewritten due to a problem such as noise, it can be restored correctly.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source, saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2325), and stored in the SP save buffer outside the game area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the caller is returned.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and bank switching is performed. Both banks of registers cannot be used without Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is restored. If a configuration is adopted in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process to restore bank 0. FIG.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. It should be noted that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Note that switch input processing 1 in step S2332 is processing related to winning signals, and switch input processing 2 in step S2080 of FIG. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2335, so winning detection is performed, but fraud by the fraud detection sensor is not detected. Note that even if winning is detected, prize ball payout, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and that fraud is not detected. For example, since settings are changed or checked while the door is open, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge members, are likely to sway. Vibration may be falsely detected. Therefore, such erroneous reporting can be prevented by stopping fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In addition, hall employees have magnets to collect balls that have fallen on the floor, which can prevent false alarms from the magnets held by employees when changing or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or restricting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on) ), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during the setting process), the means disables (or limits, regulates, suppresses, etc.) the fraud detection.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, for changing the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the minor symbol to be updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when executing the setting process for changing the set value. This is because the hardware random numbers that determine wins and losses are updated regardless of whether settings are being changed or settings are being checked. By updating even during the process of changing settings and checking settings, inconsistencies between hardware random numbers and software random numbers are less likely to occur, and the expected value of the performance in the game and the expected value that leads to the big win at the time of a specific performance. It is possible to suppress the divergence from

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). The set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process. When switching, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state), at the time of fraud detection (for example, when the door is opened, when magnetism is detected). Even if the determination is not performed regularly in a short period as in the execution of timer interrupt processing, the resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed by determining when a specific condition is satisfied.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By checking the value of the setting status management area after the setting value checking process (step S2334, FIG. 215), if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting status management area can be checked immediately after (S2335). It is controlled so that normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed to output the test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2340). Before and after the execution of the processing for outputting the test signal is started, the stack pointer and the register are saved in the same manner as other processing outside the game area, and are restored after the processing is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. In addition, if the test signal processing is executed as processing within the game control area and does not affect the game, it may be executed as processing within the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as processing within the game control area, saving and restoring the flag register (steps S2337, S2340) executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339) becomes unnecessary.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. This transmission information storage area stores a command generated each time a command is generated, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . It should be noted that each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the FIFO format transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Note that the watchdog timer uses a simple clear mode, so setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2345), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process proceeds to step S2343 in FIG.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of setting processing. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not indicate the normal game state (00H), and mainly executes the process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

As a result, in the case of a RAM abnormality, the power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted at each timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once, the RAM abnormality notification will not be sent again if the command is missing, so the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. is. Also, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the game machine, the abnormality notification will not be performed. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, the game is not played, so commands other than the power-on operation command are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormality continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. is doing.

That is, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is triggered by execution of regular processing (timer interrupt processing) that is executed every predetermined period in commands of the same system (for example, operation command at power-on), and executes a predetermined number of times (for example, , 1, 2, 3, etc.), and the second case, in which the number of times is not limited during operation of the pachinko machine and is repeatedly transmitted in a predetermined cycle. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether the peripheral control board 1510 has received it correctly, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. is the command to be sent.

When peripheral control board 1510 receives a command regarding RAM abnormality, it notifies about RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, it is preferable to invalidate the received command regarding the RAM abnormality and continue the current notification. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and the normal notification can be performed.

Commands related to RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing of transmission. Command consistency may be determined by changing a command related to a RAM abnormality depending on the timing of transmission. For example, by setting the power-on operation command (A004H) that is transmitted when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on and the power-on operation command (A005H) that is transmitted when the RAM is abnormal during a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, when the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), after the power is restored (for example, during normal play), the setting values recorded in the main control RAM 1312 and the setting state management area can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different for each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality continues at the time of power-on, it is possible to notify that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the setting value is abnormal.

It should be noted that while the RAM abnormality is being notified, the player's setting adjustment function (for example, adjustment of volume and brightness by operating buttons provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special design and the normal design is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be corrected by turning off the power once, executing power failure processing, and then, when turning on the power again, by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to activate the setting change mode. Then, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to its original state, the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game can be started.

When the power is turned on again, if an operation other than starting the setting change mode is performed with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and return to the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects whether the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ON to OFF change.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (it is determined that the setting change or setting confirmation is completed), the security signal output timer is set for the output time (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling process.

When an operation to terminate the setting change mode (turning off the setting key 971) is performed, by setting an output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is terminated can be set. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal is set to the security signal output timer as the output time value. This ensures that the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, when the hot start is performed in the normal game state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by setting change, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is started.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored. If the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or in the case of a hot start after the power is restored, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even if the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510), the timer interrupt process starts. After the transition, output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, there is provided a period during which the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
・When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to fraud detection, etc. ・After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. - After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output in setting change mode, the power is restored and the setting change mode continues. and the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, the hall computer can respond to the security signal by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapse. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356). If it is determined to be in mode, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may be configured to be used also as the RAM clear switch 954 . As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, it returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. return to the calling process.

When determining whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, even if the setting change mode is in effect at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is not turned ON at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting change switch 972 is turned on. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by an operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of setting display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not indicate the normal game state (00H), and the process of displaying the setting value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , return to the calling process.

[12-18. Another example 3 of setting change/confirmation process]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 3 described below, the main difference from the above-described example 2 is that timer interrupt processing for setting change processing is provided separately from timer interrupt processing for normal games. Processes other than those described below are the same as those of Example 2 described above.

In addition, in Example 3, as in Example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the setting change switch 972 may be used to describe the operation for changing the setting value.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the starting address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this example 3, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksum does not match or if the backup flag is not set normally, the function of the game machine is stopped as a RAM error, and the setting change operation is not performed after the game is disabled. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized and the game is controlled so as not to be executed.

Therefore, if the prohibited area of the RAM protection register is set to valid, a reset occurs due to erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to a malfunction or defect. Since the power failure process has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that there is a RAM abnormality, not only is the game initialized by RAM clearing processing, but the game cannot be restarted unless the hall employee performs a RAM abnormality cancellation operation (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "disabled".

Note that the prohibited area may be set valid. By setting the prohibited area to valid, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed illegally, etc., the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraud can be improved.

Next, a simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (not a power failure state).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has certainly started up, the hall If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register or the like as temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored later in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2406). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. Since the watchdog timer is not cleared in the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer is reset unless the power failure is canceled. This reset by the watchdog timer immediately starts the program from the start address without executing a security check like the system reset, and executes the power-on processing. Therefore, the loop of step S2406 is not exited unless the blackout warning signal is canceled.

In this way, the power failure determination process for detecting the power failure warning signal is performed in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on process, and in step S2450 of the main control side main process during the normal game. running in place. In the latter (step S2450), power failure processing is executed after step S2462 by detecting a power failure, but in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), power failure processing is not performed even if a power failure is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored correctly without executing power failure processing.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a system reset generated by the reset circuit and a user reset generated by access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312 . A system reset launches a program after security checks are performed for several hundred milliseconds, while a user reset launches the program immediately without performing security checks when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a watchdog timer resets during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. be. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by RAM clear processing, and the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, even if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality cancellation operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure is correctly restored. can return.

Thus, regarding the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality is required in order to restart the pachinko machine 1, and the case where it is not required is usually provided. When the watchdog timer resets during the game, it is when a software problem occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the contents different from the game state at the time of the power failure are stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on processing occurs when a hardware failure occurs, and the possibility of destroying the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is low. This is because there is little need to convert

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, similar processing is performed for other types of user resets than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer) caused by one of the reset factors.

Thereafter, a sub activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer times out, and activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for (step S2407). Waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any period from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, even if it is not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2408). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the system waits in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination of whether the power failure warning signal indicates a power failure may be made in either step S2406 or S2408 instead of in both.

After that, the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range (step S2409).

Thereafter, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2410), and the power-on time RAM confirmation process outside the game area shown in FIG. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2412).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in Example 3 differs from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of example 3 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 .

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 03H to 02H, and the setting change mode is terminated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power failure processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (power-off processing is not normally executed).

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting state management area is transferred to the B register. (step S2418) and proceeds to step S2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power failure". There is no need to re-execute processing (processing for determining whether checksums and backup flags match), and the size of the program can be reduced.

In addition, in the B register, the value of the setting state management area at the time of power failure or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set, and the RAM abnormal value is provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting this, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, and if YES is determined in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436 is performed. It is necessary to execute a JUMP instruction to However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by designating S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, as shown in the source code example illustrated below, the JUMP Order can be reduced.

Source code example when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111 ;
$000:
LD W,03H ;Equivalent to S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2436 ;Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000 ;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;

Example of source code when temporary setting of RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436 ;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436 ;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;

Thereafter, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the values of the PF ports are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined using the values stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when the power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, it is possible to determine an abnormality in the game control area. As a result, if there is an abnormality either inside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from steps S2426 and S2431 to step S2435. Therefore, since the values in the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, even if the same program is used for both RAM clearing processes, the calling source cannot be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example exemplified below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but in that case, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clearing process when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on. A recording process is required. Therefore, since the contents of processing are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing at the time of setting change, dedicated processing is required for each portion other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312 . Therefore, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425 in order to share the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312 when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated.

Source code example when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF port information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A ;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111 ;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;Equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2435 ;increase

$111:
XOR W,W ;increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;increase
JR S2436 ;increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Source code example when 00H is provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435 ;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A ;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436 ;

LD W,01H ;
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2426). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power supply, changing the settings, and turning on the power supply. That is, if it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting status management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is supposed to go through the setting change without fail. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of power failure is RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only with the change of the set value as a trigger.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and the stack area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal game state.

Also, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is cut off, when the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal when the power is restored, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by turning the power switch ON/OFF.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is cut off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. By doing so, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is turned off.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is cut off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is normal, and the setting When the key 971 is operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. By doing so, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is turned off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to restore the game state before the power failure occurred, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on status buffer (step S2427). In this way, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state) corresponding to production (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time and high probability) are prepared for returning to the original state.In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command used in creating the

After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Steps S2425 to S2429 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, after judging the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426), the operation of the setting key 971 may be judged (step S2428). Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, it is possible to determine an abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2432), and the game area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). Thereafter, the flag register saved in the game area stack area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435
). An unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). When the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is turned off while commands are stored in the command buffer, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer are transmitted. For example, when the power supply is interrupted during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command is transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, when only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if a command that has not been transmitted during the setting change process is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting process is transmitted after the power is restored, so that the peripheral control board 1510 There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state by In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when starting the setting change process or when starting the setting confirmation process. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is good to clear the command buffer when moving to setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to allow interrupts. In addition, the time of CTC1 for controlling timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of CTC1 for normal game remains set to be prohibited.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, win-lose random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438), the update of the hardware random number is started, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting change processing. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored in the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, if the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period in which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred in In another example 3, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the power failure monitoring process and power failure process are subroutines,
By executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, there is no need to incorporate the same program (code) for power failure monitoring process and power failure process into each timer interrupt process. size can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and it is checked whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. Determine (step S2452). If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for setting change process is repeatedly executed. .

When it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, after switching the interrupt timer to the normal game, the second main loop processing for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) to run. Before executing the second main loop process, first, set the timer interrupt cycle time in CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), stop the interrupt of CTC0 (timer interrupt for setting process), interrupt the CTC1 ( Timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt permission is set (step S2456).

After that, a power failure warning signal is obtained, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

When the power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main control side main processing shown in FIG.
In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game area (step S2464), the power OFF processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the game area stack area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is held normally, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write a setting value for validating RAM protection (writing prohibited) and invalidating the prohibited area to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function due to access to this prohibited area is cancelled, allowing access to all areas. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area to be valid in the RAM protection register, when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and other orders may be used.

In example 3, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt processing, and the power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and if the measurement result reaches a predetermined value It is preferable to detect the occurrence of a power failure.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of Also, in this execution opportunity, timer interrupt processing for setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes processing for calculating the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. It is possible to switch between executing the processing for calculating the base value and not executing the processing. In another example 3, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 .

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. It is configured so that one of the banks can be used by In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process for setting process or normal game. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag stored in the flag register is restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to return to bank 0 by executing a bank switching instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. It should be noted that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2473, so the winning detection is performed. , no fraud is detected. Note that even if winning is detected, prize ball payout, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and that fraud is not detected.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like. For example, while hall employees are changing settings or checking settings, the door is open, and the sensor attached to the door is positioned closer to the next pachinko machine. Therefore, while the setting change operation or setting confirmation is being performed, it is possible to detect any fraudulent activity caused by radio waves or the like in the neighboring pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, the value of the game state management area is usually other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is displayed in the setting state management area. Although it is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, determination is purposely made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during the normal game.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process for changing the setting value and setting display (steps S2474 to S2478) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). , a solenoid signal such as a large winning opening and an electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of command reception to the payout control board 951 . After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. A value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510 . Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is finite, unsent commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. , it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it determines whether the free space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, each time the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. If the size of commands to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit without judging the free space, all the commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, the remaining commands should be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

It should be noted that the upper limit number should be set equal to or less than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, if the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt period is 4 ms, serial communication of approximately 80 bits is possible in one timer interrupt period. If one command consists of 20 bits, 80/20=4, so the upper limit should be 4 commands. In practice, the upper limit may be set to 5 commands, which is one more command. This is because although the maximum command length was assumed to be 20 bits, there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, data is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full. It is preferable that the capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that the watchdog timer uses a simple clear mode, so setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2481), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 229 does not execute the random number update process (R_ATART_K). As with the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In another example 3, the test signal output process is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process even if it is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230). good too.

FIG. 230 is a flow chart of the normal game timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311 .

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. Any bank can be used by In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the setting process or the timer interrupt process for normal games. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag stored in the flag register is restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to return to bank 0 by executing a bank switching instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. It should be noted that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, for changing the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the minor symbol to be updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

Thereafter, switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not there is an input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control RAM 1312 . In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a 2-channel output serial communication circuit, transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel, and transmits a command to the payout control board 951 on the other channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, as for the transfer rate, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Since the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 have game value, they are not easily affected by noise and the like. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, since commands for effects not accompanied by game values are transmitted, the effects can be restored by the next command. It is desirable to send the command to the peripheral control board 1510 quickly so as not to make the user feel uncomfortable. In addition, the performance response is poor (for example, even if a game ball wins in the starting winning hole and the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 do not start to change). This is because the player feels uneasy about the failure.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), memorize to Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to the command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Also, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, it generates a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. Note that the main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2498). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning anomaly, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program creates a prize-winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

Subsequently, a switch-passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of the passage of various switches relating to the winning switch and the starting switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). The base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, before and after the execution of the base display output processing, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display It is set so that it is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the big hit symbol random number value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big win random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 . When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged), and a game ball can be received in the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. Then, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. Further, when the variable probability transition condition is established, the state is shifted to the probability variable state after that, and when the variable probability transition condition is not established, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively higher than in the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery, the second start opening door member 254
9 is to be opened or closed. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. A game advantageous to the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or jackpot game When it is in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as an output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output information, a start winning prize information output signal, and a security signal are output to the external terminal board 784 . Also, in the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

Also, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510 .

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Note that the watchdog timer uses a simple clear mode, so setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2508), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example 4 of setting change/confirmation process]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4 described below, processing related to setting change is executed in main processing on the main control side instead of timer interrupt processing. Processes other than those described below are the same as those of Example 3 described above.

In addition, in Example 4, as in Example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the setting change switch 972 may be used to describe the operation for changing the setting value.

FIG. 231 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of another example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 in place of step S2452 of the main control side main process of another example 3 (FIG. 228). Execution of setting change and setting confirmation processing in the main control side main processing is not limited to the case of separately providing timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing as in Example 4. It is also applicable to example 1 and example 2. For example, the main control main process shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop process for setting process (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop process for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of another example 1, FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. ) and normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, switching of CTC in steps S2454 and S2455, which will be described later, is unnecessary.

In the main-control-side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same processes as those of the main-control-side main process (FIG. 228) of Example 3 are given the same reference numerals.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting processing. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In Example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored in the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the power failure is detected. For example, if the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period in which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred in In another example 4, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupt is disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects whether the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ON to OFF change. If the operation to end the setting change/setting confirmation process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing has not ended, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent multiple times of changing the set value with one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 is executed once. This is so that the same edge information as the previous time is not used to change the setting in the first main loop process executed later. Only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971 . After that, the interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2453), and the first main loop processing for setting change processing, which returns to step S2450, is repeatedly executed. The reason why interrupts are disabled in the processes from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change process and the setting confirmation process from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

In addition, in the first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting processing, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is kept being cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop processing ), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are not referred to.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 is stopped, and the interrupt of CTC1 is started (step S2455), CTC1 is set to allow interrupts (step S2456).

After that, a power failure warning signal is obtained, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. If it is detected that the setting key 971 has been turned ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command notifying that fact, and controls peripheral control. Substrate 1510 may provide a notification effect on the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during the normal game, it is desirable to have a mode that does not interfere with the progress of the normal game. A character or a specific symbol may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is being turned ON may be displayed as the game progresses.

When the power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2464)
, the power-off processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is turned off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). The details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the game area stack area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is held normally, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write a setting value for validating RAM protection (writing prohibited) and invalidating the prohibited area to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function due to access to this prohibited area is cancelled, allowing access to all areas. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area to be valid in the RAM protection register, when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and other orders may be used.

In Example 4, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt processing, and power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and if the measurement result reaches a predetermined value It is preferable to detect the occurrence of a power failure. In another example 4, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of Also, in this execution opportunity, timer interrupt processing for setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes processing for calculating the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. It is possible to switch between executing the processing for calculating the base value and not executing the processing.

232 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in Example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in Example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is a thing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and bank switching is performed. Both banks of registers cannot be used without Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is restored. If a configuration is adopted in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process to restore bank 0. FIG.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. It should be noted that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

In addition, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if the winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, special symbols, normal Processing related to the progress of the game, such as symbol variation display, is not executed. Winning detection relating to the progress of the game is performed, but detection relating to fraud such as magnets and impact (vibration) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees. This is because it is considered preferable not to detect it.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). It should be noted that the value of the gaming state management area may not be determined in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. This is to deal with the fraudulent act of illegally shifting to the setting change process. Further, whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is determined before the switch input process 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing (steps S2474 to S2476) related to changing and displaying the setting value is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. Incidentally, when a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed may be generated. This is because when a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some kind of abnormality has occurred. This anomaly notification mode may be notification using a liquid crystal, lamp, or sound, such as magnet, radio wave, or vibration notification, or a security signal may be output from the external terminal board 784 . One or more of these notification modes may be employed for notification either singly or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). , a solenoid signal such as a large winning opening and an electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of command reception to the payout control board 951 . After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similarly to the setting change/setting confirmation process.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the process of S2480 or S2481 of the main process is completed instead of the timer interrupt process.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that the watchdog timer uses a simple clear mode, so setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2481), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 232, unlike other timer interrupt processing, random number update processing (R_ATART_K) is not executed. This is because there is no need to update random numbers generated by software when a RAM abnormality occurs, but random number update processing may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine with light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a light guide plate will be described. A recent pachinko machine has a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, produces a special symbol variation display game. In this type of pachinko machine, a complex presentation is possible by using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate, for example, by superimposing images. In addition, since the light guide plate is provided in front of the liquid crystal display device, a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that enables stereoscopic vision using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a greater three-dimensional effect.

However, the performance using the light guide plate has become boring, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission performance. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single plate, and there is a demand for more interesting effects by displaying a wider variety of patterns.

[13-1. structure]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5, viewed from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit illuminates the first pattern. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit illuminates the second pattern.

The display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the frame of the frame-like center role 2500 . The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center role 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center role 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of emitting light to the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 . A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surfaces of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 can be seen, and the first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 can be seen from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

Although the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described in this embodiment, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by a large number of concave-convex first reflecting portions that reflect light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction to the front side. and a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by a large number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light. In other words, the display effect unit 2600 can emit light 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611, and can emit light to display the first pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610. When light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 by light emission. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are desirably full-color LEDs, and are light-emitting sources (lens-equipped LEDs) that irradiate light in a narrow range and have strong directivity. is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 with any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

On the light guide plate 2610, unevennesses forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and unevennesses forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622 are minutely formed. When the light guide plate LEDs 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LEDs 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light, Various decorations of the unit 3000 and effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well. In the light guide plate 2610, even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back side can be seen through a transmission region, and the light with which the light guide plate 2610 is irradiated is not reflected. A glass-like processed matte region, a lame region formed with a reflective pattern that reflects light that passes through the light guide plate 2610 regardless of the direction in which the light travels, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( In other words, there is provided a moving area in which a reflective pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610 .

As shown in FIG. 234, the first pattern 2621 forms part of the effect of the special pattern variation display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as will be described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmissive area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, part of the light guide plate LEDs 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is lit, and the moving area 2621a and the moving area 2621c emit light by switching the lit portions. Therefore, by blinking the LED 2613 for the light guide plate, it is possible to make it appear that the size of the first pattern 2621 changes.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are arranged so as to be repeated twice, but they may be repeated any number of times. Complicated movements can be represented by the first pattern 2621 by forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving region and the lame region a plurality of times. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, moving regions and lame regions are alternately repeated. The moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LEDs 2613 to emit light so that the color of light emitted by the light guide plate LEDs 2613 changes, each moving region 2621a can be illuminated in a different color. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple→red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of streaks of light extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that the diagonally extending light streaks correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 . In other words, when one light guide plate LED 2614 emits light, a light streak extending obliquely downward from the light guide plate 2610 from the portion of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 emits light.

The second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 as it goes down the light guide plate 2610 , so the brightness of the light streaks becomes darker as it goes down the light guide plate 2610 . As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the light guide plate 2610
As it goes downward, the lines of light appear to extend backward, giving the illusion that the light is emitted three-dimensionally, and the light emission performance by the light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflectors so that stereoscopic viewing is possible due to parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on one light streak that constitutes the second pattern 2622, the second reflecting portion that emits the light that forms an image of the light streak on the retina of the player is positioned on the light guide plate 2610 for the left and right eyes. By arranging it at the position, a parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with depth can be shown.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment has a first pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction, a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a Instead, it consists of lame regions 2621b and 2621d formed with reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a formed with reflection patterns that reflect light traveling in a specific traveling direction. , the first pattern can be composed of a moving pattern area (dynamic pattern) that appears to move and a still pattern area (static pattern) that appears stationary.

234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 can be projected by using one light guide plate 2610 depending on the lighting direction. For this reason, a single color light (for example, red light with a single wavelength or white light with multiple wavelengths) is emitted from the side, and multiple colors of light are emitted from above (for example, a group of adjacent LEDs). 2614 emit light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the matte area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first pattern 2621 are still patterns and the moving patterns appear to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a by irradiation of light from the lateral direction. is showing That is, the first pattern 2621, which is irradiated with light from the horizontal direction, produces a light guide plate presentation with both a still pattern and a moving pattern. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture of the first picture 2621 are projected simultaneously.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a lame area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate presentation is performed with a static pattern of the first pattern 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction and a second pattern 2622 by irradiation of light from above. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be projected after the still picture is projected, or the still picture may be projected after the moving picture is projected. In this way, by projecting the still picture and the moving picture at different timings, it is possible to perform various effects. In particular, by displaying a specific character as a still picture after displaying a rainbow picture as a moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character descends. On the other hand, by displaying a character with a moving picture after displaying a background with a still picture, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character moves to a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. When the light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, in the area where the two patterns are superimposed on the light guide plate 2610, since the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that can be viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transmission region 2621f is provided so that the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through, and the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. This allows a person to easily view stereoscopically.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in separate areas without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that can be viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. By dividing the area in which the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area in which the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided, and by projecting the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily presented to the player in three dimensions. can be seen.

[13-2. Configuration of Light Guide Plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflector will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (especially the arrangement of the reflectors).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmissive area 2621f through which the rear side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through, and a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light. Lame regions 2621b and 2621d formed with reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a formed with reflection patterns for reflecting light traveling in a specific traveling direction are provided.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflector.

The reflecting portion is formed by a concave portion provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflecting surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain amount of spread (eg ±30 degrees). The streaks of light forming the second pattern 2622 are visible when the light traveling in the direction of the streaks of light is reflected by the reflecting section 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving area 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streak of light. The size of the reflecting part 2650 is desirably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is much smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown enlarged in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 is composed of a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and such that the vertical line of the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650 is reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237(B).

In addition, the direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622 a , that is, the light traveling parallel to the reflecting surface 2651 along the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 and is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 to reach the light guide plate 2610 . do not exit from the surface of Similarly, a small amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (especially an acute angle) with the light streak appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and only a small amount of light is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650, leading Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610 . For this reason, the light of the wavelengths that reach more can be seen by the player's eyes, and the pattern can be seen in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by tilting the reflecting surface 2651 a little, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 . Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a light beam with directivity. Therefore, a parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with depth can be displayed. That is, since the reflecting portion 2650 that reflects the light reaching the right eye and the reflecting portion 2650 that reflects the light reaching the left eye are located at different positions, the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye are different. A virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610 . In other words, if the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be at a deep position, and the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye are visible. If the virtual intersection point with the incoming light is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears in front.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 like the reflective surface 2651, and may be arranged so that the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is inclined. may be formed at an angle that does not reflect toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

Reflecting portions 2660 of lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are configured by spherical concave portions provided on the back side of light guide plate 2610, and travel through light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflecting portion 2660 is reflected (through a plurality of paths) and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 . Since the reflecting portion 2660 in the lame region reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, the lame region 2621b glitters when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blink at different timings. Also, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit lights of different colors, the lame region 2621b emits a mixture of a plurality of colors. Furthermore, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blink in different colors, the lame region 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and sparkles.

The matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion, but is processed to have an irregular shape like frosted glass, so that the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

So far, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an example of a light guide plate representing a different pattern will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs and the reflecting portions in the light guide plate forming the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242. FIG.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the rear surface thereof, and reflects incident light from any of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 that The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. As for the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630, the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, and the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d are illustrated. A specific light entrance section 2630a to a seventh specific light entrance section are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light receiving portions 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors. The first specific light-entering portion 2630a to the seventh specific light-entering portion (not shown) repeat in order from left to right on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) (seventh specific light-entering portion are arranged in the order of the first specific light entrance portion 2630a).

The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light entrance portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) and guides the light. It has an interface inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610 . Reflector 2670 is recessed into a pent-roof-like triangle. Reflecting portion 2670 reflects light incident from corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of light guide plate 2610 . Also, the reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 .

As a result, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the plane of the paper). A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the reflecting part 2670 as emitting light. On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 239, the incident light from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 is reflected by the reflection portion 2670 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 The reflecting part 2670 does not appear to emit light from the player sitting in front of it.

In this embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 is recessed in a triangular shape and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. However, this is not the case. , and it may extend in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 .

The plurality of reflecting portions 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entering portions 2630, and the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a and second specific light entering portion 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entering portion 2630a. a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c corresponding to the third specific light entering portion 2630c; and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d including portion 2670d and the like.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 is capable of displaying a plurality of patterns 2623 that can be illuminated in different manners by reflecting light forward from a specific reflecting portion 2670 of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 . The plurality of patterns 2623 includes a pattern 2623a consisting of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b consisting of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c consisting of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670c. A pattern 2623d made up of a portion 2670d is included.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged in order from the center to the outside in a circulating manner.

The second picture board 2612 has a strip-like shape extending left and right, and LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the respective specific light receiving portions 2630 . The plurality of LEDs 2614 includes a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, and a third specific light entrance portion 2630c. A third LED group 2614c corresponding to, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light entrance portion (not shown) (illustration omitted), a sixth LED group (not illustrated) corresponding to the sixth specific light receiving portion (not illustrated), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light receiving portion (not illustrated) (not shown). Note that FIG. 239 illustrates the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, and omits the fifth to seventh LED groups. Each LED group is formed by dividing a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the horizontal direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and sequentially from left to right. , (the seventh LED group is followed by the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614 each.

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the first reflection portion 2670a, Since the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be caused to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the second reflection portion 2670b, Since the first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect light to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be caused to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the third reflecting portion 2670c, Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, second reflecting portion 2670b, fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be caused to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, Since the first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, etc., reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be caused to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group is caused to emit light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 passes through the corresponding reflection portion 2670. The light is reflected to the front, and the other reflecting parts 2670 reflect to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflecting parts 2670 appear to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make the pattern you are holding emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching the group of LEDs to emit light, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be caused to emit light. Such light emission production can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 on which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect is achieved in which the patterns emit light like an animation that spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. can be done.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, by switching the position of the group of LEDs that emit light with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light entrance portion 2630f and the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and the light enters from the fifth specific light entering portion 2630e and the sixth specific light entering portion 2630f, the light entering the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are reflected, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d and the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and the light is incident from the third specific light entrance portion 2630c and the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection portion 2670c and the fourth reflecting part 2670d are reflected, and the pattern in which the third reflecting part 2670cd and the fourth reflecting part 2670d are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b and the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

In this way, by changing the position of the group of LEDs (LED elements) to emit light without changing the number thereof, the size of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect can be achieved in which the pattern emits light so as to move from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED groups may emit a single color, or each group may emit a different color (ie, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, by changing the number of light-emitting LED groups with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the second specific light entrance section 2630b to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected by the second reflection section 2670b. to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflect, and the second reflecting portion 2670b to the seventh reflecting portion 26
The pattern in which 70g is arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light entrance section 2630c to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected by the third reflection section 2670c to the seventh reflection section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the fourth specific light entrance section 2630d to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected in the fourth manner. The part 2670d to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting part 2670d to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection portion 2670e to the seventh reflection portion 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and light incident from the sixth specific light entrance portion 2630f to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected in the sixth direction. The part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern (light emission range) and perform a moving effect in which the pattern emits light in a shrinking manner. At this time, the LED groups may emit a single color, or each group may emit a different color (ie, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In addition, in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entrance portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflection portion 2670a, and the first reflection portion 2670a is arranged. The drawn pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b to emit light with an orange pattern. In addition, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light receiving portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to emit green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entering portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to emit blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit in indigo blue, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light receiving portion 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to emit light in the pattern in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light receiving portion 2630g to emit a purple pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. After a further period of time, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively. color changes.

In this way, the colors of the LEDs forming the group of LEDs are changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye pays close attention to patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light as if they move inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614. FIG.

In this embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflecting portion 2670 forming one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, control is performed such that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (the specific light incident portion 2630) is repeated with a group of seven LEDs as a repeating unit. Moreover, the LED is configured to emit light with directivity and illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs emitting light in the same pattern (which is the light emitting source of the light forming one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the drawing. In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 where light is incident. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ = ±30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern The pattern is separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times α).

To generalize, the following relationship is established where α is the length of the repeating unit of the LED group, θ is the illumination angle of the LED, and L is the distance separating the pattern from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 .
L=tan θ×α/2

In this way, when a moving picture that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving picture must be placed at a position a predetermined distance away from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 . In other words, the moving pattern area that displays a pattern that appears to move is smaller than the static pattern area that displays a static pattern. If the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 , moving effects can be produced by the light guide plate 2610 in an area narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Therefore, in the performance of the variable display game, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbols normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 . . In addition, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1600 where the player gazes, the excitement of the player due to the moving effect can suppress the decrease in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described. An area within a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 is formed in the visible opening window), and the player can visually recognize the area where the moving effect is not possible. In addition, the area in which the moving effect is possible is narrowed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000 . In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect is not possible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect is not possible is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , and moving effects can be performed in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 . That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the periphery of the center accessory 2500 .

Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decoration. As a result, the board serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs for causing the decoration to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be used as an area where moving effects can be performed, and the player is made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. Group 2614g is located. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In addition, in FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As illustrated, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflecting portion 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light receiving portion 2630a, and the pattern on which the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged is red. , and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b to emit light with an orange pattern. Also, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light receiving portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d to emit green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to emit blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo blue, and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light receiving portion 2630f to emit light in the pattern in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light receiving portion 2630g to emit a purple pattern.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. As time passes further, the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the colors of the LEDs forming the group of LEDs are changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye pays close attention to patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light as if streaks of light in seven colors flow.

Although the detailed description is omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two light lines intersect as shown in FIG. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and it is possible to create a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that seven colors of light streaks flow. In addition, by using left-right eye parallax to make the lines of light appear deeper or closer to the viewer as they move away from the light source, it is possible to display a pattern with a three-dimensional effect.

Next, a stereoscopic pattern and a planar pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing how the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture in plan view.

As shown in FIG. 245B, since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is curved, light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , reach the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Reflecting portion 2660 also reflects light that travels through light guide plate 2610 and arrives at reflecting portion 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, through a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front side of light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660 does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes, so that the player can see the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. will be seen as

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing how the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture in plan view.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player, and the reflecting portion 2650R Light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective portion 2650L and the reflective portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the pattern for the left eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the pattern for the right eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610 .

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how a stereoscopic pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the back side of light guide plate 2610. In FIG. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern behind the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing how a stereoscopic pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the surface side of light guide plate 2610. In FIG. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As described above, according to the display effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be illuminated by a single light guide plate 2610, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation or the like. Therefore, the thickness of the display effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, making it easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. can be arranged behind the light guide plate 2610. By improving the appearance of the game area 5a, the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players. By performing the movable performance by the upper front movable performance unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide the player with various performances, to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semi-transparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting parts 2670 emerge to show the luminous decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, to surprise and amuse the player, and to provide something good to the player. It is possible to make the player think that something might happen, and to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the luminous display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of the pattern 2623 is not visible to other players far from the front. becomes difficult to see, making it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, so that it is possible to suppress other players from paying attention and To enable a player to play a game without hesitation, to enjoy the game and to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame of the center role 2500 attached to the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are illuminated by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. Also, the light-emitting patterns do not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, making it difficult to see the game. To prevent distrust from being given to a player and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (first picture substrate 2611, the second pattern board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610, so that the light guide plate 2610 does not exist when the pattern is displayed by light emission. A strong impact can be given to the player who thought that there is no such thing, and the player can be surprised.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of a plurality of patterns different from each other by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the performance can be shown to the player, various performances can be produced by appropriately combining them, and the player can be hardly bored, and the player can be entertained by the performance by the light guide plate 2610 and the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are light-emitting displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to give the light-emitting patterns 2623 a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochromatic LEDs or full-color LEDs. In addition, the number of specific light entering portions, reflecting portions, and the number of LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of patterns.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using a light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to move the image toward the predetermined image. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249A, nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen turns black (blacks out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LEDs 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 are turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 . This causes the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621 . Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), the first pattern 26
21 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 for moving effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(D), the moving effect may move the image 1611 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 . An image 1611 that is moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249 or a different shape as shown in FIG. The image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed are images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different), or the same characters (for example, the name of the character) with the same font and color. They can be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the back side of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. It is preferable that an image is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 on both sides.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(E), in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving images 1611 occupying the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are measured over time. may be changed according to

The aspect of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Also, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use the other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. , oblique directions), different sizes (large or small) of the first pattern 2621 may be projected.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined time, the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is removed from the light guide plate 2610, as shown in FIG. 249(F). Furthermore, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blacked out. This blackout makes the player look at the liquid crystal display device 1600 and creates a space for improving the expectation for the next performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 different from the first pattern 2621 and the moving image (for example, a character with high hit reliability) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation of winning increases, but if the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the player's expectation of winning decreases. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Also, the character image 1612 is preferably displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621 . Further, along with displaying the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

Note that this character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610 . As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. A character image may be projected by irradiating light from the direction). Also, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided and the character image may be projected on other light guide plates. A light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610,
When character images with different sizes and facial expressions are displayed, an effect display with a sense of depth is possible, unlike the planar liquid crystal display device 1600 .

As described above, in the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. , the first picture 2621 may be projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253(A)), before the first pattern 2621 is projected as shown in FIG. A moving effect is started in which an image moving toward a projected position is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. - 特許庁After that, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LEDs 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 are turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 . After that, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is projected (duration of the light guide plate effect) and the effect time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) The light guide plate effect in which is projected may be started before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Also, the duration of the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game effect may be performed by switching between a moving pattern in which the patterns at which the images gather appear to move and a static pattern in which the patterns appear not to move.

In the light guide plate presentation shown in FIG. 254, when a moving picture appears, the expectation for a big win is high, and when a static picture only appears, the expectation for a big win is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 2621 to display the image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to move effect. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the static pattern 2621 is switched to the moving pattern as shown in FIG. 254(C). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect is performed in which an image 1611 that moves by pressing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends without switching the stationary pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific ready-to-win effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the specific display effect is displayed. The specific image 1611 may perform an effect together with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern may not perform the moving effect.

As described above, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, the static pattern and the moving pattern are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, so that the player has a sense of anticipation for the development of the variable display game. , it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

Next, an example of an effect in which an effect using an operating object is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. FIG.

In the rendering shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in front of the liquid crystal display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a portion of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper portion of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short period according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, the player's expectation for a big win is heightened. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 255(C), a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to display an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621. .

The movable body 3601 may emit light at the timing when this moving effect starts or during the moving effect. The light-emitting mode (light-emitting color and light-emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light-emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610 .

Players' expectations for the development of the variable display game can be increased by selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 does not appear as shown in FIG. 249 or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine can be enhanced and highly interesting.

In the above example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear in place of the pattern on which the images are gathered. For example, if the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the expression of the face can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. FIG. In this way, in addition to effects by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate 2610 is used as the effect suggesting the appearance of the movable body 3601 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), according to the progress of the variable display game, the light guide plate 2610 emits light to display a pattern 2621, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256(C), a moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. may Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(D), movable body 3601 appears from above the display screen of liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping pattern 2621 of light guide plate 2610 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), according to the progress of the variable display game, a pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without the movable object appearing.

In this manner, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body is coming out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional communication function by an 8-bit parallel bus.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. , data output from the main control MPU 1311 may be read, or an illegal signal may be input to the main control MPU 1311 to commit a fraudulent act. For this reason, a configuration that makes it difficult to externally detect the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 is required. It becomes difficult to read data or input data in line with the timing of the lines.

In addition, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring the signal when the inspection agency inspects the pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of the special electric accessory, in order to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory, the signal input to the solenoid driver (transistor) (for example, 5V on/off signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. If the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as a signal for inspection, the inspection agency will need a device for analyzing the serial signal, so it is difficult to use the serial signal as a signal for inspection. is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits signals by serial communication within the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise the output of the inspection signal. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal into two serial/parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, an inspection signal whose level changes at the same timing as the signal for driving the solenoid is generated. is to be generated. If the output transistor of the serial/parallel conversion circuit is configured with an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level will be different by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial/parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of the program for detecting the input by serial communication and reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit, and part of the signal is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise how to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power-on should be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without being input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before execution of interrupt processing, so that the signal level can be detected even in processes other than timer interrupt processing such as immediately after power-on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I/O using chip select, and input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 The level of the signal can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LEDs, and FIG. 261 is a main control MPU 1311 and peripheral It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning on the main control board 1310 of components. In FIGS. 257, 258 and 261, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.), Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, output of control signals for other devices (solenoids, etc.), and output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has multiple transmission/reception ports and multiple transmission ports. A communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311 .

The transmission/reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), chip select output terminals (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). A transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel/serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception port is not limited to that illustrated.

A larger number of serial/parallel conversion circuits may be connected by connecting like the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

A parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission/reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at level 0, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, it receives a predetermined clock signal. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (start winning opening, large winning opening count switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and photosensors. , and mainly detects game balls flowing down the game area 5a. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, but may have a 16-bit configuration by connecting in parallel integrated circuits having an 8-bit input port.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output by the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level, The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. Thus, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch with the SERTX signal as a trigger, so it can take in the data of the ball detection sensor at an arbitrary timing.

Also, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 connected to the transmission/reception port
The parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal for lighting the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317), and the data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. be done. Serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at level 0 according to a predetermined clock signal, and output signals from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the chip select signal rises to 1 next time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the segment side of the LED, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing to dynamically light the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are configured to have 16-bit output ports, but integrated circuits having 8-bit output ports may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at the timing to light the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED having a common terminal on the anode side of the LED is used for the base indicator 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a drive current flows from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. flow. However, since integrated circuits having the same configuration are used for the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342 and 1343 (the direction of the output transistor of the driver circuit) polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a driving current for lighting the LED, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of absorbing the driving current for lighting the LED.

In other words, the common side of the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317) is connected to a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 and a driver circuit 1344 that function as signal direction regulation means for regulation of the signal direction. In other words, two stages of signal direction control means are provided on the common side of the LEDs. On the other hand, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is provided on the segment side of the LED, and a one-step signal direction regulation means is provided.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel-to-serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial-to-parallel conversion function, respectively. Alternatively, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal may be used by switching between a parallel-to-serial conversion function and a serial-to-parallel conversion function.

Two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 . The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at level 0 according to a predetermined clock signal, and when CS is at 1. Output from the parallel port at the rising timing. A driver transistor is provided at the output of the parallel port, and the voltage applied to the driver transistor is switched to generate an output signal. In other words, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the channel A output ports (PA0 to PA7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, security signals, ball pay-out signals, etc.). is output. Various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. In addition, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory opening signal, Ordinary electric accessory opening signal, etc.) is output. The output port of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is not connected to anything.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same branched signal including chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output on the parallel side. Therefore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output port (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test signal output from the channel B output port (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 A signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the motion of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348 . Note that +12 V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12 V, and +5 V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5 V inspection signal. In this way, by using two serial/parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals with different voltage levels can be generated.

Among the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is thickened, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which only a relatively small current flows is thickened. The pattern can be thin. Even if the pattern is not thickened, it is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern. Patterns are formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the effective cross-sectional area, or an inner layer pattern is formed to increase the effective cross-sectional area. may be increased.

In addition, since the two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal from the other conversion circuit will not be disturbed and the output signal will not be affected. does not occur. That is, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. .

A reset signal is input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 . A reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336 . When the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal, the operation is reset and the program is executed from the top address.

The reset signal is also input to each of the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 from the reset circuit 1335 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336 . When the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 receive the reset signal, the operation is reset, and the display contents of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are returned to the initial state (for example, the display is erased).

The buffer circuit 1336 has at least four inverter buffers, two inverter buffers are arranged between the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311, and the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 and two inverter buffers are arranged between The reason why the inverter buffers with the same characteristics are arranged in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 and in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is that the two paths from the reset circuit 1335 output This is to make the waveforms and timings of the reset signals to be the same as much as possible.

The inverter buffer of this buffer circuit 1336 functions as a signal direction regulating means for passing signals in only one direction. By regulating the signal direction on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, it is possible to suppress the arrival of external noise to the main control MPU 1311. FIG. However, when the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are directly connected, the reset signal is sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at a timing different from the reset signal input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. will be entered. That is, the transmission of the reset signal to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is accelerated by the two stages of inverter buffers provided on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311, and the control is performed by the main control MPU 1311. The reset command reaches the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 first.

For this reason, in this embodiment, two stages of inverter buffers are mainly provided in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the control MPU 1311 and in the paths to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. A reset signal is transmitted to the parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at the same timing, and each circuit is reset at the same timing. In this way, the inverter buffers arranged on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 are matched with the transmission timing of the reset signal input to the paths to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 as much as possible. At first glance, the circuits provided in the two paths look similar, but perform different functions.

In general, it is not necessary to place a special circuit in the path for transmitting the reset signal output from the reset circuit. ) is required.

Further, in order to match the signal timing (to delay the signal), other types of circuits for matching the timing may be used instead of the inverter buffer described above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, an IC accommodating six inverter buffers is used, but six inverter buffers are integrated into one packaged IC. It is formed on a semiconductor chip with a A semiconductor chip is formed by several sets of circuits on a silicon wafer cut out from single crystal silicon (ingot) through several processes. This is diced to separate the circuit, and the chip-shaped circuit is packaged to form an IC. Therefore, variations in the characteristics of each of a plurality of circuits formed on the same silicon wafer are small. In this case, in consideration of this, the inverter buffer housed in one IC is arranged in two paths to make the signal transmission characteristics on the paths the same.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is arranged on the hinge side for opening and closing the frame, and the prize ball payout mechanism is also arranged on the hinge side. A game ball supplied from an island facility where a pachinko machine is installed moves in a prize ball payout mechanism in a charged state. The game ball is further electrified by friction with the resin member forming the prize ball payout mechanism. Electromagnetic noise is generated when the static electricity is discharged from the charged game ball, and this noise penetrates the electronic circuit directly or along the signal path (the electric wire constituting the harness).

As described above, the main control board of the present embodiment executes game control by interrupt processing of a constant cycle (initialization processing to timer interrupt processing described above: FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, even if the information is reset, the peripheral control device 1510 will receive new information (display data) in the next interrupt period (after 4 ms in this case) as long as the main control MPU 1311 is operating normally. A command is issued from the control MPU 1311 to return to normal operation.

However, when the main control MPU 1311 is reset, it waits for the time necessary for the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so the command to the function display unit 1400 is interrupted. When the display of the function display unit 1400 disappears, the player becomes uneasy about whether the game can be continued. Therefore, it is desirable not to reset the main control MPU 1311 .

Next, the arrangement of the inverter/buffer in the IC package and the connection of the terminals will be described. 259 and 260 are diagrams for explaining connection examples of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer.

The IC shown in FIGS. 259 and 260 has a shape in which terminals are arranged (that is, in two rows) on both sides of the IC package (for example, an insertion mounting type Dual In-line Package or a surface mounting type Small Outline Package). ), which has six inverter buffers, and the input and output terminal numbers of each inverter buffer are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-8, 11-10, and 13-12. It's becoming

Each inverter buffer is preferably not a simple inverter buffer but a Schmitt trigger type inverter buffer having a hysteresis characteristic. By giving the inverter buffer a hysteresis characteristic, the waveform of the reset signal can be reliably shaped, and the resistance to noise can be improved. Also, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, it is possible to cope with waveforms of input signals whose rise is slow. That is, in CMOS, when the level of the input signal is near the threshold for a long time, a large current flows in the gate, causing latch-up. Latch-up can be suppressed even with slow waveforms.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to terminals 3 and 11, and the reset signal input to terminal 3 is output from terminal 4 via an inverter buffer. , terminal 5 , output from terminal 6 via an inverter buffer, and input to serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 . On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 11 is output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 9, output from the terminal 8 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. be done.

In the example of connection shown in FIG. Since the reset signal sent to the main control MPU 1311 is passed through the terminal on the other side, the reset signals of the two systems do not cross each other, and the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 does not reach the main control MPU 1311. Input can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to terminals 1 and 3, and the reset signal input to terminal 1 is output from terminal 2 via an inverter buffer. It is output, input to the terminal 13 , further output from the terminal 12 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311 . On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 11, and output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer to be output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit. 1342 and 1343.

Thus, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signals sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are collected and passed through one part of the IC, and the reset signals sent to the main control MPU 1311 are collected and passed to another part. Since the reset signals of the two systems are passed through, the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 can be suppressed from being input to the main control MPU 1311 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. An inspection circuit layout area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit layout area. The circuit components (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit layout area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection agency, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. 1 (patterns for component mounting are provided). That is, although the pachinko machine 1 that is generally available on the market is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, the test signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 A relaying inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 on the market is configured so that the inspection signal is not detected by a fraudulent person and used for fraudulent activity.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided in the inspection circuit layout area although no parts are mounted thereon. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (printed pattern) in the test circuit layout area should be pulled up to the power supply (+5 V) via a resistor (or to GND). pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the pachinko machine 1 on the market does not use surface-mounted parts, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit layout area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the parts of the inspection circuit can be made smaller, the inspection circuit layout area can be made smaller, and the main control board 1310 can be made smaller. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has no parts mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit layout area are 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Of the parts of the inspection circuit, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310 . This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally on the market. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available.

By arranging the circuit parts used for inspection of the pachinko machine 1 collectively in the inspection circuit arrangement area in this way, it is easy to discover missing parts in the commercial pachinko machine 1, and additional parts for fraud can be found. Easy to find installation. Also, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 with high noise resistance can be configured.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 261, the circuit components placed in the inspection circuit placement area are oriented differently from the same type of circuit components placed elsewhere on the main control board 1310 (for example, 180 degrees as shown). rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit parts in different directions in the inspection circuit layout area and other places on the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish between the parts used in normal games and the parts for inspection. In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 on the market, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting such as erroneously arranging parts in the circuit arrangement area for inspection.

Also, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed, for example, by silk printing. The numbers may be collectively attached with the symbols and numbers following the symbols and numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit layout area are denoted by IC12 and subsequent symbols. In this way, it is possible to attach symbols and numbers that do not skip to the circuit parts for game control mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market, and to easily check after the circuit parts are mounted on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are in a separate system from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control parts, the connectors and inspection terminals connected to the game control parts can be easily identified. It is possible to distinguish between them and prevent miswiring of incorrectly connecting cables. In particular, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are the same as the symbols and numbers of the connection destinations of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient for cable connection during inspection, and connection errors can be reduced.

In addition, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are free ports that are not used, and it is preferable to arrange the free ports so as to consolidate them into adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311 . That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable that the terminals of the unused ports are arranged in a concentrated position. By concentrating and arranging the empty terminals, the area where the printed pattern is not provided on the main control board 1310 is concentrated, making it easy to discover the lack of parts and to discover the attachment of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

In addition, the terminal of the empty port is arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in terms of the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (top and bottom in the figure) of the terminals of the empty ports. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, making it easier to detect the attachment of additional parts for fraud. In other words, the number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits is eliminated, and several signal lines including control lines are used. Therefore, a clean circuit pattern is obtained. In addition, by shortening the routing distance of the data lines, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured.

In addition, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines.

Further, by reducing the number of circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 can be configured to be more resistant to noise.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311. FIG.

The parallel output port of address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. , and the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base indicator 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). Channel B output ports PB0 to PB7 of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Also, the parallel output port of address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. terminal), and channel B output ports PB0 to PB7 are connected to the segment side of the base indicator 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

On the common side of the LED (anode terminal of the LED), the output port to be turned on is switched at a constant cycle (for example, interrupt every 4 ms). When focusing on the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms), and only PA7 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). is repeatedly turned on at a constant cycle (4 ms×the number of ports). That is, when repeatedly switching 8 ports, each port is turned ON every 32 ms. Alternatively, if the channel A output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 are grouped respectively and attention is focused on the channel A output port, only PA0 and PA4 are turned ON in the timer interrupt processing, and in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later) Only PA1 and PA5 are turned ON, . . . , and only PA3 and PA7 are turned ON in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). By using serial communication for this constant cycle operation, it is possible to make it difficult to perceive the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311 .

The parallel input port of address D5 is parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1-PA7 and PB0-PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as signals of address D5.

Furthermore, general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311 receive operation information of the setting key 971, operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, power failure warning signal, primary payment ACK signal, and frame open detection switch detection signal. ing. These signals need to be monitored in real time (when requested by the program) or outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power-on). It is directly input to the MPU 1311 .

Furthermore, the general-purpose input/output ports (both input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 receive the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor, the detection signal of the vibration detection sensor, the detection signal of the magnetic detection switch, and the detection signal of the proximity error switch. is entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (malpractice, malfunction, etc.) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and since real-time monitoring (when requested by the program) is required, a parallel/serial conversion circuit is used. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervening. In addition, based on the detection signals of these sensors and switches, the abnormality is notified by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or by voice. With this anomaly notification, the staff of the pachinko hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is a false notification, it will make the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress false detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to a general-purpose input/output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double read process, in one timer interrupt process, read instructions are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or perform multiple read operations with a wait of several clocks in between. This is done by executing an instruction to determine the signal level input to a general purpose input/output port (or general purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the port level is continuously determined via the parallel/serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short period.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, signals from various switches and sensors that require real-time performance are directly input to the general-purpose input port and general-purpose output port without using extended I/O using chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (both input and output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (both input/output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, part of the signals input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is transferred to the general-purpose input/output ports (both input/output) IOP4 to IOP7. can be entered in

Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is a vacant terminal, it is pulled up to 5 V via a resistor or pulled down to GND to prevent the terminal from going to an intermediate potential and reduce the effects of noise induced in the power supply line. should be reduced. Also, if the general-purpose output port is a free terminal, it may be left open, but it should be pulled up to 5V or pulled down to GND via a dummy resistor so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the test signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial/parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are collectively input to one port, which facilitates handling by the game control program.

In addition, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are sent serially. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected multiple times in a short period of time to eliminate the influence of noise and make a decision. Ports may be assigned such that signals that do not need to be read twice are input to the general purpose port if the general purpose input port is free.

A signal to be input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port. Since any of them can be assigned, the general-purpose input/output port has high versatility for specification changes. For this reason, general-purpose input/output ports (both input and output) are desirable for the ports left as spares for adding new functions, and it is desirable to assign priority to general-purpose input ports.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the timing of data output and capture by synchronous serial signals will be described.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS 0 , the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the base display 1317 . In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected among PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected from PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data fetching timings of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data loading timing of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is fetched from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is read from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. FIG.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) in accordance with the clock signal. During this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) and controlled so as not to receive new data.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment uses the transmission signal of the open output port as a trigger to capture the output of the game ball detection sensor, so the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. FIG.

It is desirable to use the main control board 1310 in common for a plurality of models without redesigning. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which differs depending on the model, is mounted on a separate board (input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. configuration. By making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed board artwork, component layout, etc. the same, performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and designed. A main control board 1310 with stable quality can be used in common for a plurality of models without redesigning.

Also, when the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input/output board 1351, where to divide the circuit becomes a problem. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the other is a method of separating with a parallel signal converted from a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between substrates can be reduced more than the latter, which is desirable. Moreover, even if the signal itself is obtained, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unclear which data is transmitted at which timing. Furthermore, it is output at a speed synchronous with the serial signal clock, and this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if the serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the content of the data being transmitted. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 264, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are mounted inside the main control board box 1320 . The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in a sealable manner so that it cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The input/output substrate 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 . The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. Boards can be connected with a smaller number of wires. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or by a board-to-board connector.

In addition, if serial communication is used between boards, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired. In addition, the input/output board 1351 for inputting/outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and input/output signals that vary depending on the model are set on the input/output board 1351, so the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing so increases, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Furthermore, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Also, when the main control board 1310 is used for other models, the design of the input/output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. can be easily designed, and the main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. Further, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320 unless the size of the input/output board 1351 and the position of the mounting hole are changed. In addition, countermeasures against noise that vary depending on the model may be implemented by the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310 .

Serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 for outputting drive signals for the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310 . When the base display unit 1317 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input/output board 1351, and the signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are provided on the input/output board 1351. It is preferable to output from 1351.

Also, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal is preferably arranged on the main control board 1310 . That is, it is preferable to provide the inspection circuit layout area and the inspection terminals 1348 on the main control board 1310 . This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so that when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the main control board 1310 and input/output This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Also, as shown in FIG. 265, the main control board 1310 may be accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and the input/output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320. FIG.

In the form shown in FIG. 265, since the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Also, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are accommodated in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Also, if the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the input/output board box 1350 that houses the input/output board 1351 are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes more flexible. . Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it must appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 Since it does not have to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, in the form shown in FIG. 265, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

265, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. FIG. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the main control board box 1320 which is sealed, in order to prevent unauthorized persons from detecting the operation of the pachinko machine. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, there is a low possibility that a fraudulent person will perceive the operation status of the pachinko machine. This is because data is output from the data bus according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so the data rate can be easily guessed from the outside. There is something. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and the speed of this synchronous clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the content of the data being transmitted.

As described above, the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, and the input/output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input/output board 1351. It may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 as long as there is a portion where resistance to fraud and noise does not decrease even if it is arranged. For example, output of signals requiring drive current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, output of drive signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) is a function that may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 . In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that should be installed in 1310 on the main control board.

Also, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351 input a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) to an empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, it is difficult to analyze the serial signals if some of the multiple signals that the fraudster attempts to obtain are transmitted via a parallel bus or general-purpose port, and other signals are transmitted as serial signals. A fraudulent person needs to obtain signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, which enhances the deterrence against fraud.

[15. Example of Power Supply Path Inside Pachinko Machine]
Next, an embodiment relating to overcurrent protection in the power supply path inside the pachinko machine will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 is supplied with AC 24V power. The power supply board 931 has a power generation circuit 933 that generates various DC power (for example, 5V, 12V, 24V, 35V) used inside the pachinko machine 1 from the 24V AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The power output from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the performance members, the control device, and the like in order to drive accessories and lamps (LEDs) for performance and decoration of the pachinko machine 1 . Although the electric wire that supplies the drive power to such a performance member is generally fixed, the length of the electric wire in the movable part of the driving part of the character is sufficiently long so that the electric wire is not pulled by the character. is wired with For this reason, there is a risk that the movement of the accessory may cause the electric wire to rub against members constituting the accessory or be caught in the movable portion of the driving portion of the accessory, thereby damaging the covering of the wire. Under such circumstances, if the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other, they will be short-circuited and a large amount of current will flow.

However, if a short circuit occurs near the power supply board 931, a large current flows, and an overcurrent protection function (fuse) mounted on the power supply board 931 operates to cut off the power.

However, as described above, if a short circuit occurs at a location far from the power supply substrate 931, a current large enough to operate the overcurrent protection function (fuse) does not flow, and the problem does not occur. This is because the wired electric wire becomes a load. For example, if there is a short circuit at a place where the wire impedance is about 1Ω, and the driving power supplied to the production member is 12V, a current of 12A will flow, but the overcurrent protection function (eg, 15A fuse) of the power supply board 931 will operate. do not do. An overcurrent protection device (fuse) having an appropriate capacity considering the current flowing in a normal state should be attached to all the power lines, but this leads to an increase in parts cost and assembly cost.

Therefore, especially when the power line and the ground line are arranged close to each other with the electric wire passing near the movable part, the board to which the electric wire is connected operates at 2 to 3 times the current actually flowing in the power supply. Overcurrent protection devices (fuses) are placed to prevent large currents from flowing in the event of a short circuit.

Here, the upper movable unit 3400 in FIG. 16 will be described as an example of the driving device.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. body) 3410 is arranged. The point stick accessory 3410 stands by at the upper position in the non-rendering state, can move to the lower center position of the game board in the performance state, and rotates around the center decoration lamp 3412a at the center position of the game board. It is.

Although not shown, a unit base body is provided on the back side of the right side overlapping the game area when viewed from the front of the game board, and the point stick accessory 3410 is rotatably supported by the driven shaft on the unit base body. Then, the turning motion of the role object base body extending from the point stick role object 3411 to the unit base body and the turning motion of the role object base body are regulated and assisted (the vertical movement of the point stick role object 3410 is regulated and assisted), and the point It has a slit for inserting and sliding a bush provided in the accessory base of the stick accessory 3410, and is supported by an arm body movably supported by a driven shaft on the unit base body.

The unit base body is also provided with a moving stepping motor MA for moving the point stick accessory 3410 to the lower center position of the game board, a movement detection sensor, and the like. In addition, the LED board (4250A) on which the stepping motor MB for rotation for rotating the accessory base body, the rotation detection sensor, and the LED of the central decorative lamp 3412a are mounted, and the LEDs of the left and right decorative lamps 3411 are mounted. LED board (such as 4250B) is provided.

Then, the stepping motor MB for rotation, the rotation detection sensor, and the drive signal line and detection signal line for driving the LED are routed from the accessory base body together with the power line and the ground line, and the relay board (3044A , 3044B, 3044C, etc.) or directly to the production drive board 3043. Various electric wires are determined between the standby position and the performance position of the point stick accessory 3410 of the upper movable unit 3400, and have a wire length with a certain amount of play, and bundled loose wires are used. You may wire using a flat cable. In addition, although the relay board and the performance driving board are provided in the upper movable unit 3400, they may be provided outside.

FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the electrical connections of various substrates, drive sources, etc. in the upper movable unit 3400, which is the drive device described above.

24V AC power supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is input to the power board 931 . The power supply board 931 has a power generation circuit 933, to which a 24V AC power source is input via a fuse 934 as an overcurrent protection device (overcurrent protection means).

The power generation circuit 933 converts 24V AC to various DCs used inside the pachinko machine 1 (mainly 12V, 24V, 35V used for stepping motors, solenoids, LEDs, various sensors, etc., and electronic Create a power supply such as 5V used as a control power supply for the circuit (it may be created by stepping down from another DC power supply separately on the control board).

In this embodiment, a stepping motor that operates at 12V and an LED (substrate) that is lit and blinked using a 12V power supply are used as examples for explanation. Therefore, in FIG. Systems are omitted. In addition, various control lines and drive lines, which will be described later, are indicated by thin lines. It is assumed that each board is connected by a connector and a harness (electric wire).

The 12V power supply output from the power supply board 931 passes through the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards through the effect drive board 3043. (4250A, 4250B).

As shown, a relay board 3044B and a relay board 3044C are provided between the effect drive board 3043 and the stepping motor MA for movement and the stepping motor MB for rotation, respectively. Similarly, a relay board 3044A is provided between the production drive board 3043 and the central decorative lamp LED board 4250A. It should be noted that the left and right decoration lamp board 4250B is directly connected to the effect driving board 3043.

Next, various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) are supplied with driving signals for driving various stepping motors and control signals for lighting and blinking various LEDs.

When the entrance of the ball is detected by the first starting inlet sensor 2014 and the second starting inlet sensor 2551 of the first starting inlet 2002 and the second starting inlet 2004 connected to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 uses the control line connected to the payout control board 951 to operate the payout device 830 and transmits a command for executing ball payout, and uses the control line connected to the peripheral control board 1510 to input When the ball is detected, a command is transmitted to cause the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display an effect based on the result of the lottery.

Various stepping motors (MA, MB) and driving devices including various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) are driven along with the execution of the effect display. The control signal (drive signal) output from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the stepping motor driver provided on the effect drive board 3043 using the drive line connecting the stepping motors (MA, MB), and further as a drive signal. It drives by receiving a drive signal output from the production drive board.

Also, for the LEDs mounted on various LED boards, the control signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 is once received by the LED driver using the control line connecting the various LED boards, and is further processed as a drive signal on the board. Lights up or blinks in response to the output drive signal.

Here, in the case of a stepping motor, the drive signal means a so-called excitation signal given to each coil (each phase). Indicates a signal for blocking.

The stepping motor driver mounted on the effect drive board 3043 has a serial/parallel conversion function, and the control signal of each stepping motor serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, which is connected in a daisy chain, is used as a drive signal for stepping. It outputs to the motor, and is a device that operates by generating a circuit power supply inside the device when a 12V power supply is supplied.

The fuse 934 has a rated current determined from the total power consumed by the pachinko machine 1 in the normal game state, and the breaking current is larger than the rated current.
In this embodiment, a rated current of 15 A and a breaking current of 37.5 A (2.5 times the rating) are used so as not to cut off even the total current consumption of the power supply during normal use of the pachinko machine 1 .

In addition, chip fuses 3071, 3072, 3074, 3075 for current interruption are mounted on the performance drive board 3043 and various relay boards (3044A, 3044C), respectively. The roles and the like of these fuses will be explained subsequently.

[15-1. Protection of the driving device that implements accessories and LED decorations]
The effect drive board 3043 is connected to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B, and outputs a power source for lighting and blinking the LEDs and a control signal for the LED driver.

Further, fuses 3074 and 3075 as overcurrent protection devices are provided on the power lines output to the LED substrates 4250A and 4250B. This is because the movement of the accessory may cause the electric wire to rub against the members constituting the drive device or be caught in moving parts such as the drive part of the accessory, and the wire coating may be damaged. When the power line and the ground line are close to each other under certain circumstances, a short circuit causes a large current to flow through the power line. For this reason, the fuses 3074 and 3075 are operated so that the power line is not burnt out, thereby preventing damage to the parts constituting the driving device such as melting or scorching of the parts due to the burning of the power line.

The rated current of each fuse 3074, 3075 can be determined by the potential difference generated between the wires bundled together and the routing length (impedance) of the wires. The maximum potential difference occurs between the ground (0V) and the power supply voltage (12V, for example). A current obtained by using Ohm's law based on the impedance of the wire between the power supply substrate 931, which is the supply source, and this maximum potential difference is used as the breaking current.

Assuming that the 12V power supply is a load that consumes 2A of the estimated total current consumption of 15A even at normal times, if the impedance of the wire to the LED board 4250A is 2Ω, a current of 6A will flow during a short circuit. Therefore, the fuse 3075, for example, should have a rating of 2 A and a breaking current of 5 A (2.5 times the rating).

As for the fuse 3074, if the LEDs to be lit and blinked are the same as those used in the LED board 4250A and the same number of LEDs are mounted, it is assumed that the impedance of the wire to the LED board 4250B is 1.5. If the resistance is 5Ω, a current of 8A will flow in the event of a short circuit, so that the fuse 3074 with a rating of 2A and a breaking current of 5A may be adopted.

Originally, if a wire were to short-circuit anywhere, a large breaking current would immediately flow to break the fuse 934 provided on the power supply board 931, and the fuse 934 would break, but in reality, it is supplied to the load. Since even the electric wire used to connect the electric wire was regarded as a load (impedance of the electric wire), in the present embodiment, a separate fuse is provided in consideration of the impedance of the electric wire routed at a location far from the power supply board where there is a short-circuit factor. (3071, etc.) are provided to prepare for a short circuit and cut off.

Also, when the driving device is placed not only on the game board side but also on the door side, the length should be sufficient so that the electric wire for driving the driving device is not pulled when the door is opened or closed by the hall clerk. Wires are wired, but conversely, when the door is opened and closed, the wires rub against members near the wiring path, or the wires get caught in the opening and closing parts of the door (hinges, etc.) and other moving parts, causing the wires to be covered. There is a risk of damage. Under such circumstances, if the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other, they will be short-circuited and a large amount of current will flow.

Alternatively, when a hall clerk attaches and detaches the game board, if it is unavoidable to wire the wires on the hinge side or the opening/closing side, the wires may rub or get caught between the main frame and the wire coating. may be damaged. Even if the power line and the ground line are close to each other under such circumstances. A short circuit will cause a large current to flow.

In this way, the present invention can be applied even in the case of human operation of the sliding portion or in the case of human property damage. A fuse with an appropriate capacity should be placed in an appropriate position, but especially when arranging a drive unit on the door side, a relay board with a fuse mounted should be placed near the downstream of the opening/closing part of the door, which is a factor. should be placed.

So far, the fuses 3074 and 3075 have been described as examples of the second overcurrent protection device. A device such as a thermistor may also be used.

In this embodiment, a surface-mounted chip fuse is used for the fuse 3071, which is the second overcurrent protection device, in consideration of the size of the driving device. However, it is not possible to tell from the appearance whether or not electrical continuity is possible. In such a case, from the electric wire or the load (driving source) to which the electric wire is connected, the performance drive board 3043 for driving the movable body and the relay board 3044A on which the fuse is mounted must be replaced as a set.

A thermistor has the function of increasing internal resistance and cutting off current when its temperature changes due to heat generated by a large current. When its temperature returns to a low temperature again, the internal resistance is lowered and it becomes reusable. That is, if the fuse is replaced with a surface-mounted thermistor, there is an advantage that at least the board (for example, relay board) on which the thermistor is mounted does not need to be replaced and can be used continuously.

Regarding the fuse 934 as the first overcurrent protection device, a tube fuse is used in this embodiment. As you can see from the appearance, it is possible to tell whether or not electrical continuity is possible, but the fuse element of the tube fuse itself is thin and has a metallic color close to gray, so it is difficult to see whether it is blown on a general green resist substrate. Therefore, in order to make it easier to see that the fuse is blown, the metal-colored fuse element is conspicuous on the resist in the area where the fuse is mounted. It's good to print silk.

In addition, for overcurrent protection devices that have different ratings or that require special attention even if they have the same rated capacity, for the purpose of identification, a special mark (such as an asterisk) is silk-printed near the device. Different colors may be used, or the orientation of the devices may be set vertically, horizontally, or obliquely with respect to the substrate for distinction.
[15-2. Protection of Stepping Motor Driver]

The performance drive board 3043 is provided with a stepping motor driver and fuses 3071 and 3072 as overcurrent protection devices. Although two stepping motor drivers are shown in FIG.

The stepping motor driver switches the power supplied from the power supply board 931 according to the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to generate a drive signal. This drive signal drives a stepping motor incorporated in the accessory to operate the accessory. Although 12 V is supplied to the stepping motor driver and the stepping motor in the illustrated example, a necessary power supply may be selected according to the specifications of the stepping motor driver and stepping motor to be driven.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, fuses are provided in the 12V power supply lines of the two stepping motors, but in the case of daisy chain connection, fuses may also be provided in the power supply lines of the other stepping motor drivers.

The fuses 3071 and 3072 connected to the power lines of the daisy-chained stepping motors prevent damage to other stepping motor drivers caused by a large current flowing through one of the power lines. is doing. That is, if the stepping motor continues to be driven at a temperature exceeding the specified temperature, the resistance of the coil may decrease and a large current may flow into the stepping motor driver. In that case, a large current would also flow into the other stepping motor drivers connected in a daisy chain, but this is prevented.

In addition, when the resistance value of the coil decreases, the stepping motor itself heats up, and if the coating of the wire (coil) that ensures insulation is damaged, a short circuit will occur within the stepping motor. In preparation for such a situation, in addition to damage to the stepping motor driver, a separate fuse is also provided to prevent damage to the components that make up the drive device, such as melting or burning of components caused by a short circuit in the stepping motor. should be provided.

Regarding the breaking current of the fuse employed in the present embodiment, whether to mount the fuse on the relay board or on the effect drive board may be similarly determined in consideration of the wiring impedance.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is arranged on the path for supplying the AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933), and causes the power generation device to overcurrent according to the current supplied by the power generation device. A first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) that protects against a state and a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) is arranged in a path for supplying DC power, and the current supplied by the power generation device a second overcurrent protection means (such as a fuse 3075) for protecting the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to (Production drive board 3043), which is located at a position closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means, and protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state more than the first overcurrent protection means. Since the electric current required for this is small, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to performance parts such as accessories and electric wires.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance in the game, and the performance members (the point stick accessory (movable body) 3410 and the central A drive control board (effect drive board 3043) that outputs a drive signal to a drive device (upper movable unit 3400) equipped with a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) that drives a decorative lamp 3412a etc. A power source creating device (power source creating circuit 933) that creates DC power to be supplied to the power source, and a power source creating device that is arranged in a path for supplying AC power to the power source creating device according to the current supplied by the power source creating device. and a driving device protection means (fuse 934) arranged in a path for supplying DC power to the driving source to protect the driving device according to the current supplied by the power generating device (fuse 934). 3075 etc.), it is possible to effectively prevent damage to performance parts such as accessories and electric wires.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, two or more electric wires including electric wires for transmitting drive signals connected to the upstream side or the downstream side of the relay board 3044A have a potential difference with each other. The protection means (fuse 3075) performs a breaking operation with the current that flows when the wires having the potential difference are short-circuited. The current for this breaking operation is obtained from the electric potential difference and the impedance of the electric wire using Ohm's law. Therefore, even if the first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) arranged in the path for supplying the AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933) does not operate, the second protection means prevents the parts and wires from being damaged. Damage can be effectively prevented.

[16. slot machine]
The arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described so far, and the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary game machine) will now be described. Although the outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM in the same manner as the slot machine 4000 described below.

[16-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. 267 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 268 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment has various devices inside a box-shaped casing 4100 with an open front, and a front member on the front of the casing 4100. 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a one-sided manner. Above the front member 4200, there are provided an image display 4500 for effecting display and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker for effecting sound, and the like. The image display unit 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays a variety of information in addition to effects display related to the game. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display 4500 are controlled by the effects control board 4700 . That is, the image display 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means capable of controlling the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel on which a pattern or the like for decoration is drawn so that the rear cannot be seen. ) A pattern display window 4401 is formed. It should be noted that the front panel may be composed of a display device, and the reels 4301 are visible when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, and an image that directs the game is displayed mainly around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for effecting a game in the symbol display window 4401 .

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reels 4301 arranged in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 is configured by horizontally arranging a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c. Strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of patterns are drawn along the longitudinal direction are wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, so that a plurality of patterns are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c (see FIG. 269), which are stepping motors, are provided for the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c are independently driven to rotate and stop rotating. It is possible to That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c constitute the drive sources for the respective reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1, to increase drive torque and static torque. As a result, a small motor can be used as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following description, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as required. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c are called a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to the respective reels are assumed to be a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

In addition, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols viewed from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate, for example, from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of continuous symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized.

A predetermined activatable line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 . In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line that diagonally crosses each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the bottom of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b to the top of the right reel 4301c ( A line diagonally crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the top of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b to the bottom of the right reel 4301c (the line going down to the right) is the line that can be activated. Then, the player inserts medals or inputs from the credits (hereinafter referred to as "betting operation") to activate the activatable line, and based on the pattern combinations (lots) formed on the activated line. Establishment/non-establishment of a prize (role) is determined.

When a prize is established, there are cases where three predetermined patterns are lined up on the activated line, and there are cases where three predetermined patterns are lined up on another line visually. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. In addition, the line (lower line) that crosses the lower pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and the front part (visible part) facing the pattern display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above The patterns may be visually arranged on the virtual line to be positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, upward to the right, downward to the right), lines that can align the visible patterns when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are set as activatable lines, and predetermined activatable lines are activated according to the number of bets. role) is established/not established. For example, if the number of bets is 1, the middle line is the valid line, if the number of bets is 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are valid lines. and Also, regardless of the number of bets (whether the number of bets is 1 or 2), all lines may be valid, or may be dedicated to 3-coin stakes.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals accumulated in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games during the grand prize may be provided.

Below the pattern display window 4401, a stepped portion is formed to protrude forward, and the upper surface of this stepped portion serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, and a one coin insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as progress operation units for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation section 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 . A game can be executed by a player inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performing a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the information detected by the insertion sensor 4207b.

A single insert button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 . The one-card input button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by pressing it once. The max bet button 4206 can be pressed once to allow input from credits to the maximum bet amount (for example, 3), but if the credit amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the credit amount is input as the bet amount. It's like

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. A payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals (bet medals) input as the number of bets from the one-insert button 4205 and the max bet button 4206, or credits that are paid out when a prize is established. It is used when giving a command to return the stored medals (stored medals) to the medal receiving tray 4201 . In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay winning (replay winning), or medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the receiving tray 4201 .

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a game in one section. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting an error (eg, hopper error) condition of the slot machine 4000 . The return button 4208 is used to return the medals inserted from the medal slot 4203 and stuck in the medal selector 4207 to the medal receiving tray 4201 .

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. and stops the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c according to the stop operation.

A decorative plate (decorative panel) forming the lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, a medal receiving tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout port, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 269) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part of the inside of the housing. A character ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600 . The character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. A liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600 may constitute the character ratio indicator 1317 .

The character ratio indicator 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another indicator (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided on the front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 or the character ratio may be displayed on the image display 4500 .

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 . It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that it is a switch for operating the display of the character object ratio. The display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the character ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, it can be placed on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) if it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112 ), housing 4100 , or front member 4200 . Also, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

In addition, a pattern variation display device 4300 is provided at approximately the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. An external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main substrate 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000 .

Furthermore, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and a prize is awarded, this prize is awarded. or the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit due to the addition associated with winning is paid out to the medal receiving tray 4201.例文帳に追加By operating the payout button 4209, the medal payout device 4110 pays out the medals for the credit to the medal receiving tray 4201.例文帳に追加In addition, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, the medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 are stored, and the medals that have flowed in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for induction.

[16-2. Internal configuration of the slot machine]
FIG. 269 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for overall control of the game progress, and the main board 4600 is mounted with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a character ratio display 1317 that displays the character ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a display switch 1318 that switches the display of the character ratio display 1317 . The display switch 1318 may be a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character product ratio may be displayed on the character product ratio display 1317 .

All of the above-mentioned single insert button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are connected to the main substrate 4600, and these operation buttons are sensors (not shown). is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600 . Specifically, when the starting lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c) is output to the main substrate 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b and 4211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c are output to the main substrate 4600 respectively.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 4600, and various signals are input to the main substrate 4600 from these devices. Equipment includes a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal payout device 4110, and the like.

As described above, the variable symbol display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for respectively rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341b, reel drive motor 4341c). The reel driving motor 4341 is a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can rotate and stop independently. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c are provided for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-described solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. The insertion sensor 4207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600 . When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, inserted medals are detected by the inserted medals sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out, and insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medal that flows through the return gutter returns to the medal receiving tray 4201 . At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by inserting medals nor accumulation of medals is performed.

The medal pay-out device 4110 has a pay-out sensor 4110e for detecting paid-out medals one by one in the outlet, and a pay-out medal signal for each medal is input to the main substrate 4600 from the pay-out sensor 4110e. . In addition, the game medal auxiliary storage box is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a. output to At this time, the image display 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like display an error indicating an abnormality in the accumulation of medals, thereby informing the player, hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, the main board 4600 outputs control signals to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110 . That is, the main substrate 4600 outputs drive pulse signals for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. In addition, the medal payout device 4110 receives a drive signal from the main substrate 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and upon receipt of this, the medal payout device 4110 pays out medals. At this time, if the medal payout device 4110 does not have enough medals to be paid out, or if there are no medals, the payout sensor 4110e will not be able to detect the number of medals. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormal medal payout signal to the main board 4600, and the main board 4600 receives the signal to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display 4500, etc., to inform the player, hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of an abnormality.

The slot machine 4000 is provided with an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. This effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input/output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, a sound source IC 4706 and the like are mounted. The performance control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Furthermore, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 of the game arcade via the external relay terminal board 4131 . The external relay terminal board 4131 has a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, paid-out medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800 .

The power supply unit 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from 24 volt AC (24V AC) power supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC +5V (hereinafter "+5V"), DC +12V (hereinafter "+12V"), and DC +24V (hereinafter "+24V"). Three types of power of +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000 and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). The reset switch 4112u is used to clear an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel driving motor voltage switching circuit 4605 . When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. , the control is performed so that +12V is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. , the control is performed to supply +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage.

The configuration example of the slot machine 4000 has been described above. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the starting lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to be wagered, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c. is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line, and if necessary Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

As described above, each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is provided with a reel strip on which a pattern is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination of symbols displayed on the activated line). It is determined whether or not a combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401 . It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of winning combinations of symbol combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in the amount obtained by adding up the payout numbers corresponding to the displayed winning combinations.

[16-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602 and RAM 4603 provided on the main substrate 4600 will be described. The storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, but is configured in the same manner as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. The access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. is Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

Since the access area of this embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. Details of the access area will be described below.

[16-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602 . The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains stored data even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. This is not possible. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updated.

The ROM area 5100 is given addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "0000H" to "1FFFH".

The ROM area 5100 has a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for performing game control. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for game control are stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. In addition, let the area|region (1st control area, 1st data area) used for game control be the area|region for game control (1st storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) of the control program. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (function test). The second data area is not necessarily required, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) where the program and data for debugging (function inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control are stored is the area for debugging (inspection function) ( second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the character product ratio. The third control area also stores data for character product ratio calculation. A third data area may be provided for storing data for character product ratio calculation. An area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating the role product ratio without being used for game control are stored is defined as a role product ratio calculation area (third storage area). Thus, by designing the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is inspected and the game control code 13131 is stored. can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the trouble of inspecting the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. In addition, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the role product ratio can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and following areas. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address ("0AFFH") one before the first data area. In addition, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (function test) area may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is arranged between the area for debugging (functional inspection) and the area for character ratio calculation, and is treated as the area for debugging (functional inspection) in FIG. It may be treated as an object ratio calculation area.

[16-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 271 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603 . The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as it can read and write data. Also, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be held for a predetermined period by the backup power supply.

The RAM area 5200 is given addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area and an isolation area. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The role product ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the role product ratio and the calculated role product ratio (character product ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the character ratio do not necessarily need to secure a dedicated work area. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the character ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the control area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the character ratio is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the character ratio, it is not necessary to use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the character ratio. good too.

The withdrawal area is an area for temporarily storing in order to save data used in game control or debug (inspection function) control or character product ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (calculation registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) are copied to a save area before executing the predetermined process, After the processing is completed, the copied values are returned to various registers of the CPU. The retreat area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and character ratio calculation. Calculation may be divided separately. Thereby, independence can be maintained more by game control, debug (inspection function) control, and role product ratio calculation.

The isolated area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the character ratio, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the save area, and the save area for calculating the character ratio. , and is a continuous area with each area (areas before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is It becomes the previous address ("307FH") of the work area for debugging (inspection function). The isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601 .

FIG. 271 shows the details of the role product ratio calculation work area on the right side thereof. The role product ratio calculation work area may include a main area for storing the calculation result of the role product ratio, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, is set each time the data in the main area is updated in the character ratio calculation/display process, or is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 274). ) may be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 274) good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if a predetermined value is set in the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 274), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. Also, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

FIG. 272 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the role product ratio calculation work area.

FIG. 272(A) shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 272(A), the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts, the total number of payouts, the ratio of prizes, the ratio of consecutive prizes, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Stores a percentage. The number of prizes paid out is the number of medals paid out while the prize is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive award winning balls is the number of medals paid out during continuous award operation (for example, during big bonus). The total number of payouts is the total number of medals paid out in the game. The role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of payouts by the total number of payouts. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous accessory payouts divided by the total number of wins and payouts. The number of games played in an advantageous interval is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is less likely to decrease, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous interval. , is the number of games executed in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of games in the advantageous section by (the number of games in the advantageous section + the number of games in the non-advantageous section).

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the role product ratio, continuous role product ratio, and advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonus payouts, the number of continuous bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are updated in the zone update process for calculating the role ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 274), and the role ratio , the continuous role ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the role ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 275).

FIG. 272B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. Stores the number of games played in the advantageous section and the ratio of the advantageous section. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400) is reached, the write pointers for all data are moved, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers for all data are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to a storage area one behind the write pointer. This is for calculating the character ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. When the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous component ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 272(B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of award payouts, the number of continuous award payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area. Numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. The number of replays, the number of winning prizes, the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts, and the total number of games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and can store values up to 16,777,215 in decimal. A large storage area is provided because the cumulative total is, for example, the sum of data for 400 games×n (6000 games when n=15). The number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of payouts of the award, the number of consecutive payouts of the award, and the cumulative total of the number of games are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the sum total and total sum of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are each a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of games played in an advantageous section and the number of games played in a non-advantageous section are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous interval ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the data for the same 6000 games in total can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. The description is the same as in FIG. 272(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The winning payout number is the total number of medals paid out in the game. The number of games played is the number of games played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 274). ), and the role ratio, continuous role ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the role ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 275).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 272(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation work area is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 274). data is not erased by other triggers. For this reason, the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio may be erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 272(B) may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio or the calculated character ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the character ratio is over 100%, or the calculation result of the character ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio may be deleted. Further, if the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio or the calculated role product ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that there is an abnormality. Also, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the character product ratio may be calculated again.

[16-3-3. Configuration of I/O Area]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be described. An input/output port corresponds to the I/O area 5300, and each input/output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I/O area 5300. FIG. Input/output ports correspond to, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, and ports related to outputs such as large winning opening solenoids and LED drive signals. Input/output port settings (settings related to use/unuse such as input settings and output settings) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 5400 .

[16-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be explained. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of this embodiment. A parameter information setting area 5400 is an area in which various settings can be made. For example, various settings include the start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 273, the definition of the start address and the end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the character ratio calculation, and the save area for calculating the character ratio calculation is omitted, but the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for character ratio calculation and the work area end setting for character ratio calculation are the start and end settings of other work areas It is defined in the same manner as the end setting, and the character product ratio calculation save area start setting and character product ratio calculation save area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of other save areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601 . In FIG. 273, the areas are set as continuous areas, but the set areas do not have to be continuous. For example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and resetting, it is possible to perform the initial activation of the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolation area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and the initial settings can be executed again. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be set again by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly clear the RAM by accessing the isolated area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since the game is played in parallel, once the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the information in the RAM by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not set sequentially by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address of the parameter area and the set value in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[16-4. Game control]
[16-4-1. System reset startup process]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart for explaining the procedure of system reset activation processing executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on or when a power failure occurs.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting values stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area are set in the function setting registers of the CPU 4601, and the addresses of the areas assigned to the access areas are set as the setting values. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is assigned to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not assigned as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 271) is treated as an unused area. assigned. Also, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses). In the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). Security check processing is processing for determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an illegal ROM, so activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Furthermore, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

It should be noted that the processing from power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not defined by the user program, but is configured by hardware inside the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as startup setting of periodic processing (FIG. 275, timer interrupt processing) for periodically executing predetermined processing is executed. In this embodiment, the parameter setting process executes a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the user program from rewriting the setting related to the game lottery after the security check, and the device initialization setting process for other functions. running with By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom of game control is enhanced and cheating is less likely to occur in the game.

Furthermore, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or hot start to return to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603 is performed.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, when the power interruption flag is not set, and the like.

On the other hand, the CPU 4601 executes processing for returning to the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603 when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"). (Step S1022). At this time, the process that was interrupted at the time of power failure is restored by the return process. Specifically, in either of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset activation process described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the regular process (FIG. 275), the process that was interrupted at the time of power failure is resumed.

Note that the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment calculates a checksum based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when recovery processing is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) may be Calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is because the debugging (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and it does not affect the game results. Since it is a process that does not exist, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification.In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds information obtained by executing such processing Using it as a checksum calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. Depending on the situation, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled. This is because the work area for game control is more reliable than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because the verification is performed practically.

When the initialization process ends, or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, the information in the RAM 4603, which is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls, is once returned to the initial setting state.

After completing the game initial setting process, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting the debugging (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. For the information signal output processing, information signal 1 to N output processing is defined, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (information on reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) associated with the start of the game in the game start processing, debugging regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop processing ( When the inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, the debugging (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination stopped on each reel, payout accompanying the fixed combination At the time of outputting the number information, the information of the output signal regarding the payout number at the time of payout (the number of payout medals, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes standby processing for performing processing before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before the start lever 4210 is operated, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay execution instruction has been given, whether or not medals have been inserted, and whether or not medals have been settled. Confirmation of game setting values and the like are performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, a winning combination is determined, and the rotation of the reels 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes Wait processing for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach the normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to receive input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and when the winning combination is determined, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and adds the value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and adds the value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state. 271, see FIG. 272) is updated (step S1038). The processing of step S1038 can be skipped when there are no prize medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even when the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the role product ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for character product ratio calculation even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game end processing for processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no payout, this process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initialization process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[16-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial activation processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the procedure of regular processing.

When the regular processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the save area for game control shown in FIG. As mentioned above, periodic processing is interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed. need to be

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer incorporated in the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a driver (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, it performs stepping motor pulse output, origin position detection, and the like.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing times the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, calls the role product ratio calculation/display processing, and displays the medals stored in the role product ratio calculation work area. Refer to the number of payouts to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The role product ratio calculation/display processing is the same as the role product ratio calculation/display processing ( FIGS. 24 and 25 ) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 . Further, the specific calculation method of the character ratio and the specific display method of the character ratio are the same as the methods described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 . In this way, by calling the character product ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character product ratio, it is possible to confirm the character product ratio (gambling property of the slot machine 4000) based on the most recent data.

In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (character ratio, continuous character ratio, total, total total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the may be calculated only for Also, the role product ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated role product ratio may be displayed on the role product ratio display device 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main substrate 4600, and for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the character ratio on the LED.

CPU 4601 executes information output processing for outputting a signal to external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131 . Furthermore, CPU4601 outputs the command memorize|stored in the command buffer to the production|presentation control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In random number update processing, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, update processing of soft random numbers built into the CPU is executed. With the software random numbers built into the CPU, although the count itself is executed by hardware, the trigger for update is determined in this process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number updating.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of interrupts is permitted (step S1130). During execution of regular processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and the interrupt is enabled after the timer interrupt processing that was executed immediately before ends normally. It is now running. Therefore, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is configured so as not to be executed multiple times.

[16-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset start-up processing and the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each output signal function (1 to N), and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signal (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)". Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the procedure of information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure recovery even if it is destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. It is designed to let Also, the stack area used at this time is assigned to the save area for debugging (inspection function), and is assigned to a different area separated from the save area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information referred to for selecting (ON/OFF) an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). Each information signal output process only refers to the information stored in the RAM 4603, and does not write data to the RAM 4603 in the process. When writing is necessary, information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so as not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. Thereby, even if the program for executing the information signal output process is placed in a different place from the other game control programs, independence from the other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processing from step S1210 to step S1220 is executed for the debug (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function. Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing information signal output processing etc. is stored in an area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (debugging (inspection function) area), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the results of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. In addition, for purposes other than this (for example, to arrange game control programs and general-purpose programs to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), programs should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and protects all registers used in the game control area when called. Also, as mentioned above, when executing the program processing of the game control area, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, it is configured to permit only reference to the work area for game control and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) placed in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine ends, the return instruction returns immediately after the call. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. By configuring in this way, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program placed in the debug (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (game control work area, role product ratio calculation work area) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and if the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is deleted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio of the slot machine in operation, and to enhance the gambling nature of the gaming machine in operation. I can confirm.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Character ratio indicator (base indicator)
1510 peripheral control board 1600 main liquid crystal display device 2002 first start port 2004 second start port 4000 slot machine (gaming machine)
4210 starting lever 4211 reel stop button 4300 symbol variation display device 4301 reel 4341 reel drive motor 4500 image display body 4600 main substrate (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROMs
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I/O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

Main control means for performing lottery control and controlling the progress of the game based on the lottery result ;
a display device controlled by the main control means to display information about a game;
display signal output means for outputting a display signal to the display device;
A gaming machine comprising initialization means for outputting a reset signal,
the reset signal is output to the main control means and the display signal output means;
A path branched from a path of the reset signal output from the initialization means to the main control means and the display signal output means, the signal direction being able to be regulated on the path toward the display signal output means. a configured second signal direction regulating means;
In synchronism with the reset signal input to the second signal direction regulating means on the path of the reset signal from the initialization means to the main control means and output to the display signal output means, providing first signal direction regulation means configured to output a reset signal;
The first signal direction regulating means is a circuit in which a plurality of buffer circuits are connected in series like the second signal direction regulating means,
Said first signal direction regulating means and said second signal direction regulating means are integrated on the same one chip having a plurality of buffer circuits and a plurality of connection terminals electrically connected to the inputs and outputs of said buffer circuits. is a circuit
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images